JP5767774B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels on which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery, and first, a bet number is determined by a player's BET operation. The reels start to rotate when the start operation is performed with the set number of bets set, and the rotation is stopped by operating a stop button provided corresponding to each reel. When all reels stop rotating, a winning combination occurs when a predetermined winning symbol combination (for example, 7-7-7, hereinafter referred to as a symbol combination) is arranged on the winning line. To do. That is, the game is advanced by the player's operation.

  These winning combinations include special roles with a transition to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, small roles with the addition of gaming values such as medals, and replays that can be played without using gaming values. There is a re-playing role accompanied by a game. These winning combinations are generally those that allow the winning combination to be awarded on the condition that a winning lottery performed simultaneously with the start operation is won.

  Further, as this type of slot machine, for example, there is an effect that suggests the possibility of winning the special role mentioned above, and there are a plurality of effect stages. There are proposals in which the production stage is advanced such as the production of the second stage and the production of the third stage each time a forward operation (for example, a reel stop operation) is performed (for example, Patent Documents). 1).

  On the other hand, not all of the operation units for advancing the game of these slot machines are always enabled, and some of them are disabled depending on the control state. For example, before the game is started, the BET operation or the start operation is detected and the game proceeds. In this state, the reel stop operation is invalidated. For this reason, a slot machine that does not perform the progress control of the game but detects the operation when the operation of the reel stop operation unit disabled before the game is started, that is, the disabled operation There has been proposed a slot machine that can perform an effect using a section (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2003-126340 A JP 2008-148900 A

  In the slot machines described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, only the production of a predetermined pattern is executed by a game progress operation or an operation not related to the game progress control, and these effects sufficiently enhance the interest. It was not something that could be done.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine capable of executing an unexpected effect by a player's operation.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a variable display device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R), the display result is derived, one game is completed, and a slot machine (where a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R)) Slot machine 1)
A plurality of operation means (MAXBET switch 6, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) that can be operated by the player;
The first operating means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) of the plurality of operating means is involved in the game progress control, and the second operating means (MAXBET switch 6) is not specified in the game progress control. When the first operating means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated without operating the second operating means in the state (when all reels are rotating), a special effect (launch effect) is executed. When the second operation means (MAXBET switch 6) is operated before the first operation means is operated , the special effect (launch effect) is not executed , and the second operation means is operated. the first representation embodiment (pattern 1), and said second operating means in the specific state (in all reels rotate) for executing said special effect when said first operation means is operated after (MAXBET The first operating means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are also operated when the first operating means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated without operating the switch 6). Even if the second operation means (MAXBET switch 6) is operated before, any one of the effect modes (patterns) of the second effect mode (pattern 2) for executing the special effect (launch effect) Production mode selection means for selecting)
Special effect execution means (effective operation effect) for executing the special effect (launch effect) in the effect mode (pattern) selected by the effect mode selection means;
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, not only the case where the special performance is executed only when the first operation means related to the progress control of the game is operated and the case where the first operation means is operated, There is a case where a special effect is executed even when the second operation means that is not involved in the game progress control is operated before the operation means is operated, and it is originally involved in the game progress control. Since the special effect executed by operating the first operating means is also executed when the second operating means not involved in the progress control of the game is operated, the special effect starts. It is possible to have unexpectedness as an opportunity.
Note that the predetermined number of bets is a bet number of at least 2 if one bet number is set for each unit of gaming value, and a bet number of 3 or more may be set. The game may be started by setting the maximum bet number. In addition, if the number of bets is set to one for a plurality of units of gaming value, the number of bets is at least one, and two or more bets are set or the maximum bet is set. Thus, the game may be started. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
Further, the second operation means that does not participate in the game progress control in the specific state may be an operation means that participates in the game progress control in another state, or for the performance that is not always involved in the game progress control. Operation means may be used.
Further, the production mode selection means may select the first production mode and the second production mode at the same rate, or the first production mode at a higher rate than the second production mode. You may select, or you may select the 2nd production aspect in a higher ratio than the 1st production aspect.
A configuration in which the special effect is executed even when the second operation means that is rarely involved in the progress control of the game is operated when the first effect mode is selected at a higher rate than the second effect mode. In this case, the unexpectedness when the special effect is executed by operating the second operating means can be further enhanced. On the other hand, when the second effect mode is selected at a higher rate than the first effect mode, the special effect is not executed when the second operation means that is rarely involved in the progress control of the game is operated. In this case, the unexpected effect can be enhanced by not executing the special effect that is always executed in spite of operating the second operating means.

The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1,
Before a display result is derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), a prize including a special prize (special role) accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state (BB) advantageous to the player is generated. Pre-decision means (internal lottery) to decide whether to allow,
In the case where it is determined that the generation of the special prize (special role) is permitted and the case where it is not determined that the occurrence of the special prize (special role) is determined, The feature is that the selection ratio of the production mode (pattern) is different.
According to this feature, when operating the second operating means that is not involved in the game progress control in the specific state, it can be estimated that a special prize is allowed to be generated depending on the frequency of execution of the special effect. In the specific state, when the first operation means related to the progress control of the game is operated without operating the second operation means, it is difficult to estimate the possibility of occurrence of a special prize. . For this reason, by selecting whether to operate the second operating means before the first operating means in the specific state or to operate the first operating means without operating the second operating means. It is possible to play a game by selecting either a game property that is easy to guess the possibility of occurrence of a special prize or a game property that is difficult to guess.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1 or means 1 , wherein
The special effect executing means, when the second effect mode (pattern 2) is selected, before the first operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated. When the means (MAXBET switch 6) is operated and the special effect (launch effect) is executed, the first operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated as the special effect (fire effect). It is characterized by being continuously executed until
According to this feature, the special effect that is executed when the operation of the first operation means that is normally involved in the progress control of the game is triggered by the operation of the second operation means before the first operation means. When the first operation means that is supposed to be started is continuously executed, it is possible to share the effect after the special effect, and the data capacity related to the effect In addition, the effect after the special effect will proceed in the same way regardless of whether it is triggered by the first operation means or the second operation means. It will be easy.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1, means 1 or 2 ,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game in response to the operation of the plurality of operating means (MAXBET switch 6, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) and transmitting control information (command) based on the progress control of the game ( Main control unit 41),
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) that includes the special effect execution means and controls the effect based on control information (command) received from the game control means (main control part 41);
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information storage means (command transmission buffer) capable of storing a plurality of control information (commands) transmitted to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91);
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (command) stored in the control information storage means (command transmission buffer) one by one to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91);
Involved operation detection means for detecting an operation of the first operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) in the specific state (reel rotation processing);
Non-participating operation detecting means for detecting an operation of the second operating means (MAXBET switch 6) in the specific control state (reel rotation processing);
When the involved operation detection means detects the operation of the first operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) or the non-participation operation detection means detects the operation of the second operation means (MAXBET switch 6) Operation control information setting means for storing operation control information (reel stop command, operation detection command) capable of identifying the operation of the operation means in the control information storage means (command transmission buffer),
Including
The special effect execution means executes the special effect based on the operation control information (reel stop command, operation detection command) received from the game control means (main control unit 41),
The game control means further includes control information determination means for determining whether or not control information is stored in the control information storage means in the specific state,
The game control means (main control section 41) determines whether or not control information (command) is stored in the control information storage means (command transmission buffer) in the specific state (reel rotation process). A determination means,
When the control information determination unit determines that the control information (command) is stored, the operation control information setting unit determines that the non-participating operation detection unit is the second operation unit (MAXBET switch 6). Even if an operation is detected, the operation control information (operation detection command) is not stored in the control information storage means (command transmission buffer).
According to this feature, the control that has not been transmitted to the control information storage means in a specific state where the operation of the first operation means is involved in the game progress control and the operation of the second operation means is not involved in the game progress control. In a state where information is stored, even if the operation of the second operation means is detected, a plurality of operation control information capable of identifying the operation of the second operation means is not stored in the control information storage means. . As a result, a plurality of operation control information that can identify the operation of the second operation means not involved in the progress control of the game is not stored, and a plurality of the operation control information is stored. The transmission of the operation control information that can identify the operation of the operation means can be prevented from being greatly delayed.
The operation control information setting unit may detect the operation of the second operation unit when the non-participating operation determination unit detects that the control information determination unit determines that the control information is stored. The operation control information is not stored in the control information storage means. In this case, the detection of the operation of the second operation means may be invalidated, and the control information determination means does not store the control information. The operation control information may be maintained without being invalidated until it is determined, and when it is determined that the control information is not stored, the operation control information may be stored in the control information storage unit.
Further, in the above, when the operation control information setting unit determines that the control information determination unit stores the control information, the non-participating operation detection unit detects an operation of the second operation unit. Even when the operation control information is not stored in the control information storage unit, the non-participating operation detection unit determines that the control information determination unit stores the control information. The configuration may be such that the operation of the second operation means is not detected. Even in such a configuration, the operation of the first operation means is involved in the game progress control, and the second operation means In a specific state in which the operation is not related to the progress control of the game, in a state where control information that has not been transmitted is already stored in the control information storage unit, the operation of the second operation unit is not detected, and the second operation unit operates Even if it is Not be more stored in identifiable operation control information control information storage means an operation of the operating means of. As a result, a plurality of operation control information that can identify the operation of the second operation means not involved in the progress control of the game is not stored, and a plurality of the operation control information is stored. The transmission of the operation control information that can identify the operation of the operation means can be prevented from being greatly delayed.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 and 1 to 3 ,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game in response to the operation of the plurality of operating means (MAXBET switch 6, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) and transmitting control information (command) based on the progress control of the game ( Main control unit 41),
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) that includes the special effect execution means and controls the effect based on control information (command) received from the game control means (main control part 41);
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Periodic processing execution means for executing periodic processing (command transmission processing) at regular intervals (2.24 ms);
Each time the periodic process (command transmission process) is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times), the state (ON / OFF) of whether or not the plurality of operation means are operated in the periodic process (command transmission process). Operation control information transmitting means for transmitting operation control information (operation detection command) to the effect control means;
Including
The special effect execution means executes the special effect based on the operation control information (operation detection command) received from the game control means (main control unit 41),
The game control unit (main control unit 41) performs a periodic process from when power supply to the slot machine is started until the operation control information (operation detection command) is first transmitted by the operation control information transmission unit. The number of times of (command transmission processing) further includes a number of times selection means for selecting any number of times from a plurality of predetermined number of times,
The operation control information transmission unit is configured to perform the first operation control information (command transmission process) when the periodic processing (command transmission process) of the number of times selected by the number selection unit is executed after power supply to the slot machine is started. (Operation detection command) is transmitted.
According to this feature, since the operation control information indicating whether or not the operating means is being operated is transmitted to the effect control means, the operation means that is not involved in the progress control of the game is operated by the effect control means. In addition, the operation control information is transmitted at regular intervals regardless of whether or not the state of whether or not the operation means is operated is changed. Even if it is missed, the latest state can be acquired from the operation control information transmitted next time.
Further, the operation control information is transmitted every time the periodic process is executed a predetermined number of times. However, after the power supply to the slot machine is started, the periodic process is performed until the operation control information is transmitted for the first time. Therefore, even if the transmission interval of the operation control information is specified, it is difficult to specify the timing at which the game control means is activated. It can be effectively prevented.

It is a front view of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of the combination defined as winning. It is a figure which shows the lottery value used for an internal lottery. It is a figure which shows the lottery value used for an internal lottery. It is a figure which shows the lottery value used for an internal lottery. It is a figure which shows the lottery value used for an internal lottery. It is a figure which shows the transfer condition of RT. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of RT. It is a figure which shows the operation switch which is related to the progress control of a game according to a control state, and the operation switch which is not related to the progress control of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the detection status of the operation switch after the game is over until the game start. It is a timing chart which shows the detection status of the operation switch after the game is over until the game start. It is a timing chart which shows the detection state of the operation switch after a game start until the game end. It is a timing chart which shows the detection state of the operation switch after a game start until the game end. It is a timing chart which shows the storing time of a command. It is a timing chart which shows the storing time of a command. It is a timing chart which shows the storing time of a command. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing which shows the structure of a stop switch. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the time which operation of a stop switch requires, and the maximum delay time of a command. It is a figure which shows an example of the production which a sub CPU performs. (A) is a figure which shows the pattern of a step-up effect, (b) is a figure which shows BB winning expectation degree according to pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the execution situation of a step-up effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution situation of a step-up effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution situation of a step-up effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution situation of a step-up effect. (A) is a figure which shows the pattern of an invalid operation effect, (b) is a figure which shows the selection rate according to pattern, and BB winning expectation degree. It is a figure showing the execution situation of invalid operation production. It is a figure showing the execution situation of invalid operation production. (A) is a figure which shows the pattern of an effective operation effect, (b) is a figure which shows the selection rate according to pattern, and BB winning expectation degree. It is a figure showing the execution situation of effective operation production. It is a figure showing the execution situation of effective operation production. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which a main CPU performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process which a main CPU performs at the time of error occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which main CPU performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which main CPU performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main CPU performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main CPU performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main CPU performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which main CPU performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which main CPU performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main CPU performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main CPU performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the switch input determination process 1 which main CPU performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the switch input determination process 2 which main CPU performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the door monitoring process which main CPU performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the command transmission process which main CPU performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the power interruption interrupt process (main) performed when main CPU receives the voltage drop signal from a power interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which a sub CPU performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the operation detection process 1 which a sub CPU performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the operation detection process 2 which sub CPU performs in a timer interruption process (sub). 12 is a timing chart illustrating a control state when the main CPU is activated in the second embodiment. 10 is a timing chart illustrating a control state of a sub CPU 91a according to the second embodiment. 12 is a timing chart illustrating a control state when the sub CPU 91a is activated in the second embodiment. 12 is a timing chart illustrating a control state when the sub CPU 91a is activated in the second embodiment. 12 is a timing chart illustrating a control state when the sub CPU 91a is activated in the second embodiment. 12 is a timing chart illustrating a control state when the sub CPU 91a is activated in the second embodiment. 12 is a timing chart illustrating a control state when the sub CPU 91a is activated in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the browsing condition of stand information. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of the main CPU and sub CPU at the time of a setting change. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of the main CPU at the time of setting confirmation, and a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an administrator mode screen. It is a figure which shows a history data clear screen. It is a figure which shows an option screen. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (main) which the main CPU of Example 2 performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the command transmission process which the main CPU of Example 2 performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which the sub CPU of Example 2 performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which the sub CPU of Example 2 performs for every fixed interval. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which the sub CPU of Example 2 performs for every fixed interval. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which the sub CPU of Example 2 performs for every fixed interval. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the operation detection process 1 which sub CPU of Example 2 performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the operation detection process 2 which sub CPU of Example 2 performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process (sub) which the sub CPU of Example 2 performs by receiving a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side end of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is pivotally supported.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 3, “black 7”, “white 7”, “net 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, “white bell”, “black” are provided on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively. A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “bell”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. Further, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and the back surface further has a concealing member for concealing the inside. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front door 1b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, the maximum bet number (a game in this embodiment) among a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range. 2 when the status is RB, 2 for the general gaming status and 3 during BB (except RB), the MAXBET switch 6 that is operated, the medal stored as credits, and the medal used for setting the number of bets Settlement switch 10 operated when paying out (returning medals used for setting credits and bets), start switch 7 operated when starting the game, reel L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in BB, which will be described later, and an error code that indicates the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the betting number by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R for informing that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting (FIG. 4).

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 1a or A medal selector having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that is inserted from the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4 and selectively flows to the hopper tank 34a side to selectively switch to one of the medal payout exits 9 side. The door opening detection switch 25 (refer FIG. 4) which detects the open state of the front door 1b is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output substrate 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the amount of stored medal stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, the overflow tank 35 is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed). 36a, automatic checkout for selecting whether the automatic checkout function is effective / invalid for controlling automatic checkout processing (processing for adjusting (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of BB described later A switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state. A reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (race rate). Power switch 39 is operated when FF is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is RB, a prescribed number of bets is set to two, and when the prescribed number of bets is set, the winning lines L1 and L4 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the gaming state However, in the general gaming state and during the BB (other than RB), the prescribed number of bets is set to three, and when the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 1) become effective. . In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set over the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L3 set across the symbols arranged in the lower right direction, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, Four types of pay lines L4 set over the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, straddling the symbols arranged in the upward direction, are defined as the pay lines.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a winning combination) on any activated pay line is assigned to each reel 2L. When the display results of 2C and 2R are stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with a medal payout is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each of the symbol combinations arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols. It is supposed to be.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A random number circuit 42 for generating a signal, a pulse oscillator 43 for supplying a clock signal of a constant frequency to the random number circuit 42, and a detection signal input from a switch connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101. Switch detection circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for controlling the driving of the power supply power supplied to the slot machine 1 When a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, when the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the main CPU 41a In addition, a reset circuit 49 for supplying a reset signal to the main CPU 41a and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 is changed as a basic process, and step by step according to the change of the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process to move to. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can interrupt the basic process by the occurrence of the interrupt and execute the interrupt process. The voltage output from the power interruption detection circuit 48 The power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed in response to the input of the decrease signal, and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). In addition, the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repeated process according to the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), an effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above, which are arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These effect devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output control unit may determine the output pattern of the effect device, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be performed. The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the effect device.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, Supplied to a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not inputted for a certain time, a clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and a slot machine 1 The power supply voltage is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, this is indicated The power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a pressure drop signal to the sub CPU 91a, other circuits, and the like are mounted. The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40 and performs an effect. While performing various controls, each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). One of the interrupt terminals of the sub control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines, and the sub CPU 91a receives the strobe signal. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes an interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. One of the interrupt terminals of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 98, and the sub CPU 91a responds to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98. Execute processing (sub). Further, when an unused interrupt occurs in the sub CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  The set value is confirmed by operating the start switch 7 before the set value is confirmed. At this time, the start switch 7 is started only when an operation switch other than the start switch 7 is not operated. Even if the operation of the switch 7 is enabled and the operation switch other than the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is not determined even if the start switch 7 is operated.

  In order to confirm the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on with no bet amount set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by turning the setting key switch 37 to the OFF state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48, a power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (in this embodiment, 5AH) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c, that is, a specific value other than 0 In addition to storing data, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, and the RAM 41c is stored. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis The processing state of the main CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the value of the data for use is correct, but the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or is destroyed. If the value of the diagnostic data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state so that the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until

  In this embodiment, all the data stored in the RAM 41c is held by the backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and when the main CPU 41a determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal when the power is turned on. Although the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, only the data necessary for the restoration of the control state in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 41c. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the backed up data.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore the state of all input ports to the state before power interruption.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a detects the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98, the sub CPU 91a also executes a power interruption interrupt process (sub). In the power interruption interrupt processing (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 91c described later, and destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 91c, and data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on 0 becomes 0 and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. The processing state of the sub CPU 91a is restored to the state before the power interruption. If the RAM parity is not 0 (1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main CPU 41a, the performance is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  In this embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 91c is held by the backup power source even during a power failure, and the sub CPU 91a determines that the data in the RAM 91c is normal when the power is turned on. Although the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, only the data necessary for restoration of the control state is backed up in the event of a power failure out of the data stored in the RAM 91c. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the backed up data.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player It is not necessary to restore the state of the input port or the progress in the middle of the production when it is interrupted. For example, while backing up only the data indicating the gaming state such as BB or general gaming state, other than the effect corresponding to the gaming state (the BB effect during the BB, the normal effect when the general game state) If a power outage occurs during the execution of a specific production (such as a small role announcement), it will be backed up when the power is turned on instead of resuming the specific production that was being performed at the next power-on. An effect corresponding to the gaming state being played may be executed from the beginning.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the BB. The special work is a work in which data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90, data such as various software random numbers, and the like that are not initialized before the setting is changed are stored. The set value work is a work that stores a set value used when a lottery is performed in the internal lottery process. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a destroys the data in the RAM 41c at the time of start-up when the setting key switch 37 is ON, when a RAM error occurs, at the end of BB, or at the time of start-up when the setting key switch 37 is OFF. Otherwise, when the five initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of startup and shifts to a setting change state, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the storage area of the RAM 41c, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the used stack area are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 is performed before the change of the setting change state. However, the initialization 1 is performed at the end of the setting change state, or both before the change of the setting change state and at the end of the setting change state. Also good. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost. Therefore, the initialization of the set value work is not performed in the initialization at the end of the setting change state.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB), a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as BB), and a general gaming state as gaming states. 2 is defined, and 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets in the BB (other than RB) and the general gaming state. Therefore, if the gaming state is RB, the game can be started when 2 is set as the bet number, and if the game state is BB (other than RB) and the general gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. And the game can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state is set, the winning line according to the gaming state is activated, and in RB (BB) The winning lines L1 and L4 are activated when 1 is set, and the winning lines L1 to L4 are activated when 3 is set as the number of bets in BB (other than RB) and the general gaming state. It will be.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment plays a role on an activated pay line (hereinafter, the activated pay line is simply referred to as a pay line) when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped. A winning combination will be awarded when all the combinations of symbols are called. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  As the role in the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 5, the big bonuses (1) to (5) (hereinafter, the big bonus (1) is BB (1) and the big bonus (2) is BB ( 2) Big Bonus (3) is BB (3), Big Bonus (4) is BB (4), Big Bonus (5) is BB (5)), Regular Bonus (1) (2) Regular Bonus (1) is RB (1), Regular Bonus (2) is RB (2)), Cherry, Minor (1), Minor (2), Watermelon, Replays (1) to (5) are defined as game actors.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and two medals are paid out in BB (other than RB) and the general gaming state. In RB, 14 medals are paid out. In addition, in the BB (other than RB) and the general game state, when the symbol of “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, the cherry is placed on the two winning lines of the winning lines L1, L3 or the winning lines L2, L4. As a result, the cherries are won on the two winning lines, so that four medals are paid out.

  The small role (1) wins when a combination of “white bell-white bell-white bell” or “white bell-white bell-black bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any game state. In BB (other than RB) and the general gaming state, 8 medals are paid out, and in RB, 15 medals are paid out.

  The small role (2) wins when the combination of “Replay-White Bell-Replay” or “Replay-White Bell-Orange” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any game state, and BB (other than RB) ) And 8 medals are paid out in the general gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out in the RB.

  A watermelon is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 6 medals are paid out in the BB (other than RB) and the general gaming state. In RB, 15 medals are paid out.

  One wins when one of the winning lines has a combination of “net 7-white 7-BAR” in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in any gaming state.

  Replay (1) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is complete on the winning line in BB (other than RB), general gaming state, and RB (1) described later. Replay (2) is a combination of “replay-white bell-white bell”, “replay-white bell-net 7” on the winning line in BB (other than RB), general gaming state and RB (1) described later, A prize is awarded when the combination of “Replay-White Bell-Cherry” is complete. Replay (3) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Cherry-Replay” is aligned on the winning line in BB (other than RB), the general gaming state, and RB (1) described later. Replay (4) has a combination of “white bell-white bell-replay” or “white bell-white bell-orange” in the winning line in BB (other than RB), general gaming state, and RB (1) described later. Wins when they are ready. Replay (5) is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-cherry-watermelon” is aligned on the winning line in BB (other than RB), general gaming state, and RB (1) described later. When any one of the replays (1) to (5) wins, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the bet amount again. This is substantially the same as the corresponding 3 or 2 medals are paid out.

  BB (1) is awarded when the combination of “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is aligned on the winning line in the general gaming state, and BB (4) is “Black 7-Black 7-” in the general gaming state. A winning combination is obtained when the combination of “White 7” is prepared, and BB (5) is awarded when the combination of “White 7-White 7-Black 7” is prepared in the general gaming state.

  When BB (1) (4) (5) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB (1) (4) (5) and simultaneously shifts to RB (3). RB (3) is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of a small role, and when RB (3) starts, when 8 games are consumed, or 4 When a game is won (any kind of combination is acceptable), the game ends, whichever comes first. If BB (1) (4) (5) is not finished when RB (3) is finished, the process proceeds to RB again and repeats until BB (1) (4) (5) is finished. 3). That is, during BB (1) (4) (5) triggered by BB (1) (4) (5), control is always performed to RB (3). The BB (1) triggered by the winning of the BB (1) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB (1) exceeds 345, and the BB (4) (5) BB (4) (5) triggered by the winning of) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB (4) (5) exceeds 89. (1) At the end of (4) and (5), the RB is also ended regardless of whether the end condition of the RB (3) is satisfied.

  BB (2) is awarded when the combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is aligned on the winning line in the general gaming state, and BB (3) is “BAR-BAR” on the winning line in the general gaming state. -BAR "wins when the combination is complete.

  When BB (2) (3) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB (2) (3), respectively. BB (2) (3) is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of RB (1) (2). (1) When (2) wins, it shifts to RB (1) (2), respectively. If BB (2) (3) is not finished when RB (1) (2) is finished, RB (1) (2) wins again to move to RB (1) (2) respectively. . BB (2) (3) triggered by the winning of BB (2) (3) is when the total number of medals paid out to the player in BB (2) (3) exceeds 345 finish. If RB (1) (2) is in progress at the end of BB (2) (3), RB (1) (2) is also ended.

  RB (1) is a combination of “white bell-replay-white bell”, “white bell-replay-black bell”, and “white bell-replay-white 7” on the winning line in BB (2) (3). Or RB (2) is a combination of “Net 7-Black 7-Black 7” on the winning line in BB (2) (3). Wins when you have the right.

  When RB (1) (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to RB (1) (2), respectively. RB (1) (2) is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of a small role. After RB (1) (2) starts, 12 games are played. When the game is completed, or when winning eight games (any kind of combination is acceptable), whichever comes first.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the acquired random number for internal lottery and the lottery value of each combination determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value Done accordingly.

  In the internal lottery, the lottery value determined corresponding to the role that is the subject of the internal lottery, the current gaming state and the set value is sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of addition overflows, It is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (lottery value / 65536) according to the size of the lottery value.

  If a winning combination of any combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  In this embodiment, BB, BB + small combination, and BB + re-playing combination are subject to internal lottery only during BB non-carry-over in the general gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, during the non-carrying of BB in the general gaming state, BB (1), BB (1) + small role GR (small role (1) + small role (2)) + 1, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Watermelon, BB (1) + Watermelon + 1, BB (1) +1, BB (1) + Replay (4), BB (1) + Replay (5), BB (1) + Replay GR (Replay (3) + Replay (4) + Replay (5)), BB (2), BB (2) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Replay (1), BB (2) + Replay (4), BB (2 ) + Replay (5), BB (2) + Replay GR, BB (3), BB (3) + small role GR + 1, BB ( ) + Cherry, BB (3) + Cherry + 1, BB (3) + Watermelon, BB (3) + Watermelon + 1, BB (3) +1, BB (3) + Replay (1), BB (3) + Replay (4), BB (3) + replay (5), BB (3) + replay GR, BB (4), BB (4) + small role GR + 1, BB (4) + cherry, BB (4) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (4) + Watermelon, BB (4) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (4) + 1 sheet, BB (4) + Replay (1), BB (4) + Replay (4), BB ( 4) + Replay (5), BB (5), BB (5) + Cherry, BB (5) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (5) + Watermelon, BB (5) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (5) + 1 Sheet, BB (5) + replay (1), BB (5) + replay (4), BB (5) + replay (5) Subject to parts lottery, lottery value is used, respectively corresponding to the set value.

  In addition, RBs are subject to internal lottery only when RBs are not carried over in BB (2) and (3). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), RB (1) and RB (2) are subject to internal lottery while RB is not carried over in BB (2) (3), and lottery values corresponding to the set values Are used respectively.

  Moreover, in all gaming states, the small role is subject to internal lottery, but the gaming state is not carrying over BB in the general gaming state, or carrying over BB in the general gaming state, BB (2) (3 ) Depending on whether it is in the middle or in the RB, the type of the small combination subject to the internal lottery differs.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), during the non-carrying-over of the BB in the general gaming state, the small role GR, the small role (1), the small role (2), the small role GR + 1, cherry, cherry +1 Sheets, watermelons, and watermelon + 1 sheets are targeted for internal lottery, and lottery values corresponding to set values are used.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, during the carryover of the BB in the general gaming state, during the BB (2) (3), the small role GR, the small role (1), the small role (2), the small role GR + 1 sheets , Cherry, cherry +1 sheet, watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, and 1 sheet are subject to internal lottery, and lottery values corresponding to set values are used.

  As shown in FIGS. 7D and 7E, during the RB, the small role GR + 1, cherry, cherry + 1, watermelon, watermelon + 1 are subject to internal lottery, and lottery values corresponding to the set values are respectively Used. In RB (1) (2) and RB (3), the types of the small roles subject to internal lottery are the same, but are RB (1) (2) or RB (3). Depending on whether the lottery value is different.

  Also, in all gaming states except RB (3) (BB (1) (4) (5)), the re-gamer is subject to internal lottery. In these game states, It is controlled to one of RT (0) to (8) with different lottery probabilities, and is subject to internal lottery depending on which state of RT (0) to (8) is controlled. Different types of re-game players.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8A, in RT (0), replay (1), replay (2), and replay (3) are targets of internal lottery, and lottery values corresponding to set values are respectively set. Used.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, in RT (1), replay (2) and replay (3) are targets of internal lottery, and lottery values corresponding to set values are used. However, even in RT (1), during the carry-over of BB, during BB (2) (3), and during RB (1) (2), each re-game and each setting shown in FIG. 9 (e) Since lottery values corresponding to the values are added and used, in this case, replay (1), replay (2), replay (3), replay (4), replay (5), and replay GR are internal lottery. It becomes a target.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, in RT (2), replay (2) is a target of internal lottery, and lottery values corresponding to set values are used.

  As shown in FIGS. 8D, 8E, and 9A, in RT (3) to (5), replay (1), replay (4), and replay (5) are targeted for internal lottery. A lottery value corresponding to the set value is used. In any of RT (3) to (5), the types of re-game players to be subjected to the internal lottery are the same, but whether it is RT (3), RT (4), RT (5 ) Depending on whether the lottery value is different.

  As shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, in RT (6) and (7), replay (1), replay (4), and replay (5) are targets of internal lottery, and lottery corresponding to the set value. Each value is used. However, in RT (6) (7), since the lottery values corresponding to each re-playing role and each set value shown in FIG. 9 (e) are added and used, replay (1), replay (4), Replay (5) and replay GR are targeted for internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 9D, in RT (8), replay (1) and replay (3) are targets for internal lottery, and lottery values corresponding to the set values are used. However, even in RT (8), during BB (2) (3) and RB (1), lottery values corresponding to each re-game and each set value shown in FIG. 9 (e) are added. In this case, the replay (1), the replay (3), the replay (4), the replay (5), and the replay GR are targets for internal lottery.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even when the winning combinations are different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop operation position area is determined based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn on the winning line to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the winning combination is aligned on any winning line. Create a stop control table that defines the number of sliding frames to be pulled in to prevent reels from being stopped, and if none of the winning combinations are selected, slipping that does not match any winning combination on the winning line A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if a winning combination can be stopped on any winning line in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, control is performed to align and stop them. In this case, the winning combination is controlled so that the winning combination is stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  If the special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or if the special role and the small role are elected at the same time when the special role is not carried over, the special role and the small role are won simultaneously. The number of sliding symbols is set so that the winning small role is drawn to the winning line within the range of 4 frames, and the winning small role is drawn to the winning line within the range of up to 4 frames. For stop operation positions that cannot be inserted, a stop control table in which the number of sliding symbols is determined so as to draw the selected special combination to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn.

  In this embodiment, when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected, the control for aligning the small role on the winning line is prioritized over the special role, and the special role is given only when the small role cannot be drawn. However, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and it is possible to win the small role only when the special role cannot be drawn. It is good also as a structure.

  The special role and re-playing role are selected when the re-playing role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when the special role and re-playing role are won at the same time without the special role being carried over. In the case of winning at the same time, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-playing combination are arranged within 5 symbols for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, that is, with an interval of 4 frames or less. Therefore, if a special combination and a replaying player are elected at the same time, the replaying game will always be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R by the player. Will be. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  In the present embodiment, a “white bell” is arranged above one of the “replays” constituting the small role (2) in the left reel, and the “replay” or “ A “white bell” or a “black bell” is arranged immediately below the “orange”. When winning the small role (2), control to align with the winning line L4 is performed. Therefore, when winning the small role (2), the left reel, middle reel, A combination of “white bell-white bell-white bell” or “white bell-white bell-black bell” is arranged in each middle stage of the reels. For this reason, even when the small role (1) wins or the small role (2) with the same number of payouts as the small role (1) wins, the combination of “white bell-white bell-white bell” or The combination of “white bell-white bell-black bell” is aligned on a straight line, and the winning of these small roles can be easily recognized.

  In this embodiment, in the left reel, the constituent symbols of the small combination (1), small combination (2), watermelon and re-game combination are all arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames. While it can always be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, the cherry and one component symbol are partly placed beyond 5 symbols, and if the stop operation is not performed at the timing of the pull-in range, a prize will be won Cannot be stopped on line.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3 (3), the “cherry” constituting the cherry stops at either the upper stage or the lower stage of the left reel, and the “net 7” constituting one sheet is the upper stage of the left reel, The stop position at which it stops at one of the lower tiers is arranged in excess of the four frames that are the maximum pull-in range.

  For this reason, when a left reel stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (No. 0 to 11) at which “Cherry” can be pulled up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line, “Net 7 Cannot be stopped on any winning line by drawing up a maximum of 4 frames, and a stop operation position (13 to 19) capable of drawing a maximum of 4 frames and stopping on any winning line No.), when a left reel stop operation is performed, a maximum of four frames of “cherry” cannot be drawn and stopped on any winning line. That is, there is no stop operation position that can aim at “cherry” and “net 7” at the same time on the left reel.

  In addition, the number of medals awarded for a cherry is greater than that for a single prize, and the probability that a cherry will win is higher than the probability that a single will win alone (including simultaneous winning with a special role only). When the left reel is stopped at the timing (# 0 to 11) within the “cherry” pull-in range, the left reel is stopped at a timing within the “net 7” pull-in range. The expected payout of medals increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the small role (1) is won in the general gaming state, the stop operation is performed at the timing of No. 3 among the stop operation positions (No. 0 to 11) of the left reel having a high expected payout value. In this case, if the 4th "white bell" is stopped at the lower stage, the "cherry" will stop at the upper stage, so the 4th frame is drawn and the 9th "white bell" is stopped at the upper stage. Is done. The same applies when the stop operation is performed at the timing of No. 8. If the “white bell” of No. 9 is stopped at the lower stage, “Cherry” stops at the upper stage. Control is performed to stop the “white bell” of the number at the top. When the stop operation of the left reel is performed at a timing other than these, control is performed to stop the “white bell” at the upper stage or the lower stage by pulling in 0 to 3 frames.

  In addition, when the small role (2) is won in the general gaming state, when the stop operation is performed at the timing of No. 4 among the stop operation positions (No. 0 to No. 11) of the left reel having a high expected payout value, If the “replay” of the number is stopped at the upper stage, the “cherry” is stopped at the lower stage. Therefore, the control for stopping the “replay” of the eighth position by pulling in four frames is performed. Similarly, when the stop operation is performed at the timing of No. 9, if the “white bell” of No. 13 is stopped at the upper stage, “Cherry” stops at the lower stage, so that four frames are drawn and 13 Control to stop the “replay” of the number in the lower stage is performed. In addition, even when the left reel is stopped at the timing of No. 17, when winning the small role (2) as described above, four frames are drawn to perform control for stopping the winning line L4. Control is performed to stop the “replay” of No. 0 in the lower stage. When the operation of stopping the left reel is performed at a timing other than these, control is performed to stop “Replay” in the lower stage by pulling in 0 to 3 frames.

  In addition, when winning the small role GR in the general gaming state, or winning the BB non-carrying small role GR + 1 in the general gaming state, 0-3 frames of the left reel are stopped at any timing. Control is performed to stop the “white bell” at the upper or lower level by pulling in or stop “replay” at the lower level.

  Also, when winning the BB + small role GR + 1 in the general gaming state, winning the BB + small role GR +1 carryover in the general gaming state, if the left reel is stopped at the timing of No. 3, 4 frames Pulling in the 9th "white bell" to the upper stage is controlled, and if the left reel is stopped at the 4th timing, 4 frames are pulled in and the 8th "replay" is stopped to the lower stage. When the control is performed and the left reel is stopped at the 8th timing, the control is performed to pull the 4th frame and stop the 14th "white bell" at the upper stage, and the stop operation at the 9th timing. In the case of performing, control is performed to pull in four frames and stop “Replay” of No. 13 in the lower stage. Also, when the left reel is stopped at the 17th timing, control is performed to pull in 4 frames and stop the “replay” of 0th in the lower stage. When the operation of stopping the left reel is performed at a timing other than these, control is performed to stop the “white bell” at the upper stage or the lower stage by pulling in 0 to 3 frames, or stop the “replay” at the lower stage.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the BB is not carried over in the general gaming state, only when the small role (1) or the small role (2) is elected alone, 3, 8, or 4, 9, 17 When the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the number, the small role GR or the small role GR (1) is won while the small role (1) or the small role (2) wins with 4 frames drawn In such a case, the small role (1) or the small role (2) wins by always pulling in 0 to 3 frames.

  When the BB is carried over in the general gaming state, the third and eighth positions are not only when the small role (1) or the small role (2) is won alone but also when the small role GR + 1 is won. Alternatively, when the left reel is stopped at the timings of Nos. 4, 9, and 17, the small combination (1) or the small combination (2) wins by drawing 4 frames.

  Therefore, in the state where the BB is carried over, the ratio of winning the small part (1) or the small part (2) is higher than that in the state where the BB is not carried over, and the winning of the four pieces is therefore increased. Along with the winning of the small combination (1) or the small combination (2), it is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the BB is won.

  In addition, when the small role (1) is elected alone in the general gaming state or when the small role (2) is elected alone, the small role (1) or the small role (2) wins a prize. The stop operation positions of Nos. 3, 4, 8, and 9 are included in the stop operation position (No. 0 to 11) of the left reel having a high expected payout value, so that the player performs a stop operation at a timing when the expected payout value is high. When the game is performed, the small combination (1) or the small combination (2) can be awarded with four frames drawn with a probability close to the design value.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the main CPU 41a continues to rotate the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. On the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  In this embodiment, except for the inside of RB (3) (BB (1) (4) (5)), re-game players are subject to internal lottery, and these re-game players are subject to internal lottery. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, it is controlled to one of RT (0) to (8).

  RT (0) shifts when RT (3) ends due to the consumption of the specified number of games, and replay (1) wins and RT (() regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT (0). 4), whether replay (2) or replay (3) wins and moves to RT (3), or either BB wins and moves to RT (6) or RT (7) The process ends when any BB wins. In RT (0), except for the case of winning simultaneously with BB, replays (4) and (5) are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probabilities for replays (1) to (3) are 1 / Although 10.9, 1 / 546.1, and 1 / 1.12, the medal payout rate per game is less than 1, but it is higher than RT (4).

  RT (1) shifts when RB (2) is activated, and replay (2) or replay (3) wins RT (3) regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT (1). (However, even if replay (2) or replay (3) wins during BB (2) (3), it does not shift to RT (3), and in this case RT (1) is maintained. ), Either BB wins and moves to RT (6) or RT (7), or ends when either BB wins. In RT (1), replays (1), (4), and (5) are not eligible for internal lottery, except for the case of winning simultaneously with BB after shifting to the general gaming state, and winning of replays (2) and (3) The probabilities are 1 / 273.1 and 1 / 7.75 for setting 6, respectively, and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1.

  RT (2) shifts to the end of BB (1), and replay (2) wins and shifts to RT (3) regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT (2). Either BB wins and the game moves to RT (6) or RT (7), or either BB wins to end the game. In RT (2), replays (1), (2) to (5) are not subject to internal lottery except when winning simultaneously with BB, and the winning probability of replay (2) is 1/7 at setting 6. .54, and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1.

  RT (3) is when the replay (2) or replay (3) wins in RT (0) (1) (2) (8) after transition to the general gaming state (however, BB (2) (3) The replay (2) and replay (3) wins are excluded, and the specified number of games (in this embodiment, when the replay (2) win is used as an opportunity, the 3333G wins the replay (3) win. 33G) and digest to RT (0), either BB wins to RT (6) or RT (7), or either BB wins To do. In RT (3), replays (2) and (3) are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probabilities for replays (1), (4), and (5) are 1 / 1.72 and 1/65, respectively, with setting 6. .5, 1 / 65.5, and the payout rate of medals per game is 1 or more.

  RT (4) is the time when replay (1) wins in RT (0) (1) (2) (5) (8) after entering the general gaming state (however, in BB (2) (3) Regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT (4), replay (4) or replay (5) wins and transitions to RT (5) , Either BB wins and moves to RT (6) or RT (7), or ends when either BB wins. In RT (4), replays (2) and (3) are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probabilities for replays (1), (4), and (5) are 1 / 8.20 and 1/187, respectively, with setting 6. .2, 1 / 187.2, and the medal payout rate per game is less than 1.

  RT (5) shifts when replay (4) or replay (5) wins in RT (4), and replay (1) wins regardless of the number of games since shifting to RT (5). The process is terminated when either RT (4) is entered, any BB is elected and migrated to RT (6) or RT (7), or any BB wins. In RT (5), replays (2) and (3) are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probabilities for replays (1), (4), and (5) are 1 / 2.64 and 1/41 at setting 6, respectively. 0.0 and 1 / 41.0, and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1, but higher than RT (4).

  RT (6) transitions to the general gaming state, then transitions to RT (0) to (5) (8) when BB (3) (4) is elected, after transition to RT (6) Regardless of the number of games, the game ends when the winning BB (3) (4) wins. In RT (6), replays (2) and (3) are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probabilities of replays (1), (4), and (5) are 1 / 5.94 and 1/58, respectively, with setting 6. .6, 1 / 58.6, and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1, but higher than RT (4).

  RT (7) transitions to the general gaming state, then transitions to RT (7) when BB (1) (2) (5) is elected in RT (0) to (5) (8). Regardless of the number of games, the winning BB (1), (2) and (5) will end when they win. In RT (7), replays (2) and (3) are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probabilities for replays (1), (4), and (5) are 1 / 2.73 and 1/30 with setting 6, respectively. .9, 1 / 30.9, and although the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1, it is higher than RT (4) and higher than RT (6).

  RT (8) shifts at the time of winning BB (2) (3) or at the end of BB (4) (5), and RB (2) regardless of the number of games after shifting to RT (8). Activates and moves to RT (1), or after shifting to the general gaming state, replay (1) wins and moves to RT (4) (however, replay (1) during BB (2) (3) ) Does not shift to RT (4), but in this case RT (8) is maintained) or replay (3) wins and shifts to RT (3) (however, BB (2) Even if Replay (3) wins during (3), it does not shift to RT (3), in which case RT (8) is maintained.) The process ends when either RT (6) or RT (7) is entered or any BB wins. In RT (8), replays (2), (4), and (5) are not subject to internal lottery, except for the case of winning simultaneously with BB after transition to the general gaming state, and winning of replays (1) and (3) The probabilities are 1 / 10.1 and 1 / 30.2 at setting 6, respectively, and the medal payout rate per game is less than 1.

  In the general gaming state, the winning probabilities for special roles (including simultaneous winnings with small roles) and the winning probabilities for small roles in RT (0) to (5) (8) are the same probability, and RT (6 ) In (7), special roles (including simultaneous winnings with small roles) are not subject to lottery, but the winning probability of small roles is the same as RT (0) to (5) (8).

  Of RT (0) to RT (8), RT (3) has a medal payout rate of 1 or more per game, so RT (0) to ( 2) It becomes a relatively advantageous gaming state compared to (4) to (8).

  In addition, even if the RT (3) is the same, RT (3) triggered by the replay (3) wins has a specified game number of 33G, whereas RT triggered by the replay (2) wins In (3), the specified number of games is 3333G, and RT (3) triggered by replay (2) wins is more likely to continue than RT (3) triggered by replay (3) wins There are many numbers and it becomes an advantageous gaming state.

  RT (0) (8) has a medal payout rate of less than 1 per game, but RT (4) (5) has the highest medal payout rate from RT (0) to (8). However, RT (0) (8) has the possibility of transitioning to RT (3). From these points, RT (0) (8) , RT (4) (5) is a relatively advantageous gaming state.

  In RT (8), the probability of transition to RT (3) is about 1/4, whereas in RT (0), the probability of transition to RT (3) is about 1/2. Furthermore, in RT (8), replay (2) that shifts to RT (3) with a large number of prescribed games is not subject to internal lottery, and from these points RT (0) is relatively more than RT (8). It becomes an advantageous gaming state.

  In RT (1) (2), although the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1, replay (1) that shifts to RT (4) is not subject to internal lottery and is selected as a special role or Except when winning, since replay (2) or replay (3) always wins and shifts to RT (3), the gaming state is more advantageous than RT (0) (8).

  In RT (2), only replay (2) that moves to RT (3) with a large number of prescribed games among replay (2) and replay (3) is subject to internal lottery, so RT (2) , The gaming state is more advantageous than RT (1).

  RTs (4) to (7) have a medal payout rate of less than 1 per game, but RTs (5) to (7) have a higher probability of winning a re-gamer than RT (4). The payout rate of medals per game is high, and a gaming state that is relatively advantageous over RT (4) is achieved.

  Here, the transition situation of RT (0) to (8) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10, BB (3) or BB (4) is selected in any of RT (0) to (5) (8). Then, the process proceeds to RT (6), and when BB (1), BB (2) or BB (5) is won, the process proceeds to RT (7).

  If BB (2) wins in RT (7), BB (2) will operate and it will transfer to RT (8) simultaneously. Further, when BB (3) wins at RT (6), BB (3) is activated, and at the same time, the routine proceeds to RT (8). When RB (1) wins in BB (2) and BB (3) and RB (1) is activated, there is no transition from RT (8) to another RT, and BB (2) Only when RB (2) wins during BB (3) and RB (2) is activated, the process proceeds to RT (1). Therefore, when RB (2) is activated even once during BB (2) and BB (3), RT after the end of BB (2) and BB (3) becomes RT (1), and BB (2 ), When only RB (1) is operating during BB (3), RT after the end of BB (2) and BB (3) becomes RT (8).

  When RT (6) wins BB (4), BB (4) is activated, RB (3) is activated at the same time, and RB (3) continues to operate until BB (4) ends. Also, when BB (5) wins at RT (7), BB (5) is activated, RB (3) is activated at the same time, and RB (3) continues to operate until BB (5) ends. . Then, after BB (4) and BB (5) are finished, the process proceeds to RT (8).

  When RT (7) wins BB (1), BB (1) is activated, RB (3) is activated at the same time, and RB (3) continues to operate until BB (1) ends. Then, after the end of BB (1), the process proceeds to RT (2).

  In RT (1) (2) (8) after the end of BB (1) to (5), RT (replay (2) or replay (3) wins) unless BB wins or wins. The process proceeds to (3), and when Replay (1) wins, the process proceeds to RT (4). However, since the replay (1) is not subject to the internal lottery except in the case of winning simultaneously with the BB in RT (1) (2), except in the case of the BB winning in RT (1) (2) Always shift to RT (3). In RT (2), only replay (2) is subject to internal lottery except when winning simultaneously with BB. Therefore, in RT (2), the specified number of games is excluded except when BB is won. Always shift to long RT (3).

  In RT (3) where Replay (2) won, if any BB won or won 3333G, except RT, moved to RT (0), and Replay (3) won RT In (3), when 33G is digested except when any BB wins or wins, it shifts to RT (0).

  In RT (0), as in RT (8), except for the case where BB wins or wins, when Replay (2) or Replay (3) wins, it moves to RT (3) and replay (1 ) Will shift to RT (4), but the ratio of winning the replay (2) (3) among the replays (1) to (3) will be RT (0) rather than RT (8). Is higher, and RT (0) has a higher probability of shifting to RT (3).

  When Replay (1) wins at RT (0) (8), the process proceeds to RT (4). In RT (4), when Replay (4) or Replay (5) wins, it moves to RT (5), and after shifting to RT (5), Replay (1) wins again to RT (4). Return to. Also, there is no transition from RT (4) to RT (3).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the winning of BB is triggered, the winning probability of the re-gamer is shifted to RT (6) or RT (7), which is higher than RT (4), and at RT (4), At the same time, the winning of the replay (4) (5) with a high winning ratio is triggered by the replaying player winning RT (5) higher than RT (4). For this reason, when a replay (4) (5) with a high ratio of winning simultaneously with BB in RT (4) wins, the winning probability of the replaying role is high regardless of whether or not the special role is actually won. In order to shift to the state, the player's expectation for winning the BB can be increased by increasing the winning frequency of the re-gamer.

  In addition, in RT (5) to (7), in addition to replay (1), the winning probability of replays (4) and (5) in which the winning probability is extremely low in RT (4) increases, so that replay (4) ( After winning 5), RT (4) (5), which usually does not appear in RT (4), wins further, so that the expectation for winning the BB can be further enhanced.

  In addition, when a re-gamer is elected with the BB carried over, priority is given to the control of aligning the elected re-gamer on the winning line over the special role, and the special game will stop when the constituent symbols are within the drawing range. Even if the operation is performed, the re-gamer always wins, so the BB is won in the state (RT (5)-(7)) in which the re-game (moving after the replay (4) (5) wins) has a high probability of winning. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the game has been performed, and it is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation that the BB is won.

  Also, RT (5), which is transferred when Replay (4) (5) wins and BB is not won, BB is won or won regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT (5). Since it continues until either condition of winning or replay (1) wins, the replay player's winning frequency increases after replay (4) or replay (5) wins The expectation for the fact that BB is elected can be enhanced, and even if BB is not elected, RT (5) in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than RT (4) continues. The expectation to this can also be raised.

  In addition, since RT (5) will be terminated by winning the replay (1) that is always won when winning, RT (5) is surely terminated only by the result of the internal lottery. And RT (5) will not continue.

  In this embodiment, the replay (1) winning is always applied when winning as the end condition of RT (5), but it will always stop when the winning role is won in the internal lottery. If the display result to be applied is applied as the termination condition for RT (5), RT (5) will be reliably terminated only by the result of the internal lottery, and RT (5) will not continue indefinitely.

  The display result that always stops when the winning combination that is the ending condition in the internal lottery may be a winning mode that always wins, as in Replay (1), Both of the display modes that stop when it is missed may be used. That is, in this case, regardless of whether a prize is won or missed, one of the display modes is stopped, and RT (5) always ends.

  Also, in this embodiment, the replay (4) (5) with a high ratio of winning simultaneously with the BB shifts to RT (5) at the time of winning, but at the time of winning a general role with a high ratio of winning simultaneously with the BB. Alternatively, the display mode may be shifted to RT (5) when the display mode at the time of losing a general combination with a high ratio of winning simultaneously with BB is stopped.

  Further, in this embodiment, RT (5) is terminated when winning a replay (1) in which the winning probability changes by shifting to RT (5), and RT (5) is played as a small role. The end probability of RT (5) can be set without affecting the winning probability of a general role whose winning probability does not change even if the transition is made. In other words, in the general game state, when a general combination with a winning probability uniformly determined regardless of the transition of RT is set as the termination condition of RT (5), other RTs are used in designing the average number of continued games of RT (5). This will also affect the winning probability of the general combination in the game, but if the re-playing role whose winning probability changes with the transition to RT (5) is set as the termination condition of RT (5), Even if the average number of continued games of RT (5) is designed based on the winning probability of the combination, the winning probability of the re-playing combination in other RTs is not affected.

  Also, in this embodiment, since Replay (1), which will end RT (5), may win at the same time as BB, Replay (1) won and RT (5) ended. Even in this case, it can be expected that BB is newly won.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the replay (2) (3) wins at RT (0), the game shifts to RT (3) where the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than RT (4), while RT ( When the replay (1) wins at 0), the process shifts to RT (4), and the RT (5) shifts when the replay (4) (5) wins at RT (4). In addition, even if Replay (2) or Replay (3) wins before Replay (1) wins at RT (0), RT (3) having a higher probability of winning the re-gamer than RT (4). ), It is possible to increase opportunities that are advantageous to the player by increasing the winning probability of the re-gamer.

  In addition, when replay (2) or replay (3) wins at RT (0) and shifts to RT (3), RT ( 0), it can be expected to transfer to RT (3) again.

  Further, after the end of the BB, there is no possibility of shifting to RT (4) directly, and there is a possibility that RT (3), that is, RT (3) and RT (0) may shift to a looping state. (2) Since it moves to (8), even if staying at RT (4), it can be expected that RT (3) and RT (0) will loop by BB winning after that. In particular, after the end of BB (1), except for the case where BB is elected, the process always shifts to RT (2), so that RT (3) and RT (0) loop. You can expect even more.

  Also, in BB (2) and BB (3), RB (2) operates during that time, and after the end of BB, RT (1) always moves to RT (3) except when BB is elected. ), The expectation that RB (2) operates over the period of BB (2) and BB (3), that is, RT (3) and RT (0) loop may be maintained. it can.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 3, “black 7” is arranged below “net 7” constituting RB (2) in the left reel, and “black 7” constituting RB (2) in the right reel. The “net 7” is arranged on the top of the line, and when RB (2) is won, control is performed so that RB (2) is preferentially aligned with the winning line L3, and RB (2 ), The percentage of the display mode in which “7” is arranged in two rows (lower right and middle straight line) is increased, so that the player is informed that RB (2) has moved to RT (1). Can be clearly recognized.

  Also, the symbol constituting RB (1) in the left reel is the same “net 7” as RB (2), and the “replay” constituting RB (1) in the middle reel constitutes RB (2). Arranged one above "Black 7". Furthermore, both when winning RB (1) and when winning RB (2), if the left reel is in the first stop, “net 7” is the common pull-in piece for the stop operation position that can stop at the winning line. Stop control of the left reel is performed using a stop control table with a predetermined number, and when RB (1) is won, “net 7” is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel, and the middle and right reels are rotated. In the case of the middle reel, the middle reel is controlled to stop using the stop control table in which the number of frames to be pulled in which the “replay” constituting the RB (1) is prioritized and stopped in the upper stage is determined in the upper stage of the middle reel. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the RB (2) constituent symbols in the order of left and middle, the left reel and the middle reel both at the time of winning RB (1) and at the time of winning RB (2) Because the stop mode of the same is the same stop mode, the right reel will eventually stop Until, it is possible to RB (2) maintains the expectations for it to operate.

  Further, in this embodiment, in any of RT (0), (5), and (8), when Replay (1) wins, the process shifts to RT (4). In other words, the display mode in which RT (5) ends and the display mode in which RT (0) (8) shifts to RT (4) are common, and the transition to RT (4), which is disadvantageous to the player. By sharing a different display mode, the game is easy to understand.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a freeze command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a game state command, a standby command, a stop command, an error command, a return command, a setting start command, a confirmation start command, a confirmation end command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  These commands are composed of 1-byte type data indicating the type of command and 1-byte extension data indicating the content of the command, and the sub CPU 91a can determine the type of command from the type data.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game. Sent when a medal is inserted or the bet number is set by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 in a state where is not set. Further, since the BET command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, it is possible to specify that the betting number setting operation has been performed by receiving the BET command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, and in a state where a predetermined number of bets is set, Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Further, since the internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to specify that the start switch 7 has been operated by receiving the internal winning command.

  The freeze command indicates that the freeze command is controlled to a freeze state, which will be described later, and when the freeze command is controlled, the start timing is that all reels are rotating, the first stop time, or the second stop time. This command is transmitted when it is determined to control the frozen state in a freeze lottery to be described later.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted each time stop control is performed in accordance with the stop operation of each reel. Since the reel stop command is transmitted when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, it is possible to specify that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated by receiving the reel stop command. .

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is a command that can specify the game state of the next game, and is transmitted when the setting change state ends and when the game ends.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to an error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is sent and reset. When the error state is canceled after the operation is performed, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main CPU 41a has returned to the control state before power interruption, and is transmitted when the main CPU 41a returns to the control state before power interruption.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change state, and is transmitted when shifting to the setting change state. Further, since the control state of the main CPU 41a is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it is possible to specify that the control state of the main CPU 41a has been initialized by the setting start command.

  The confirmation start command is a command indicating the start of the setting confirmation state, and is transmitted when shifting to the setting confirmation state. The confirmation end command is a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state, and is transmitted when the setting confirmation state ends.

  The operation detection command indicates that the detection state of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control among the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R has changed from OFF to ON, or This command indicates that the state has changed from ON to OFF, and is transmitted when the detection state of the operation switch that is not involved in the progress control of the game has changed.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). When the power is turned on, one game is finished (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command, error command, setting start command, and return command are generated in a startup process and a game process, which will be described later, and temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c. It is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The error command, the setting start command, and the return command are generated in the above-described startup process, stored in a special command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the above-described timer interrupt process (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated. In addition, addresses (0 to 15) are assigned to the storage areas for the respective commands. Further, in the normal command transmission buffer, a transmission pointer indicating an address of an area where a command to be transmitted next is stored and a storage pointer indicating an address of an area where the command is to be stored next are set. The transmission pointer is incremented by 1 every time an unsent command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted, and the storage pointer is incremented by 1 when storing the command. The address indicated by the transmission pointer and the address of the storage pointer have the same number when all the commands are transmitted and when all areas of the normal command transmission buffer are full due to untransmitted commands. If an unsent command is stored, the unsent flag is set. Therefore, if the address indicated by the send pointer and the address of the stored pointer are the same number, the unsent flag is set. If the untransmitted flag is not set, it is indicated that the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands, and that the untransmitted command is empty.

  The special command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one of an error command, a setting start command, and a return command can be stored is allocated. The special command transmission buffer stores a setting start command when shifting to the setting change state when the power is turned on, and stores a return command when returning to the state before the power interruption. An error command is stored when an error occurs and when the error is cleared.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game is finished, the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 at an interval of 0.56 ms, and executes a timer interrupt process (main) when the interrupt 3 is generated. It is executed every 56 ms. In the timer interrupt process (main), timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to these timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. . Command transmission processing for transmitting commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer, error commands stored in the special command transmission buffer, return commands or setting start commands, and door commands stored in the door command transmission buffer Is executed at the timer interrupt 2, the command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) in which the command is executed at intervals of 1.12 ms. Therefore, every time the main CPU 41a executes the timer interrupt process (main), that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally. There is.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once every four timer interrupt processes (main), that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. Only one of the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the error command stored in the special command transmission buffer, the return command or the setting start command, and the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted. Thus, even when a plurality of commands are transmitted continuously, they are transmitted with an interval of at least 2.24 ms, and the sub-control unit 91 side reliably acquires these continuously transmitted commands. be able to.

  In this embodiment, a command other than a door command is generated in the activation process or the game process, and stored in a normal command transmission buffer or a special command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer.

  Unsent command stored in normal command transmission buffer, unsent error command stored in special command transmission buffer, return command or setting start command, or door command transmission in command transmission processing in timer interrupt 2 When an unsent door command stored in the trust buffer is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, an unsent command or door command sent in the normal command send buffer is sent. Unsent door commands stored in the trust buffer are sent.

  Specifically, when an untransmitted command is detected, a delay random value set in a range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in a delay counter provided in a special work in the RAM 41c. At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, Send unsent commands.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  In this embodiment, the normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area where a plurality of commands can be stored, and a new command is generated without waiting for transmission of an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The command can be stored in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In addition, when commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer in the basic processing, these commands are stored in the order of generation, and in the command transmission processing, commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. ing. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated. If an error command, return command or setting start command is stored in the special command transmission buffer, an error will occur as a rule even if a command generated earlier is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. A command, a return command, or a setting start command is transmitted with priority. However, this is not the case when an error command, return command, or setting start command is stored in the special command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer (during delay). Sends the command waiting for transmission with priority. If an unsent command remains in the normal command send buffer after sending a command waiting to be sent, give priority to the error command, return command, or setting start command stored in the special command send buffer. Send.

  Further, when an error command, a return command, or a setting start command is stored in the special command transmission buffer, a door command transmission is requested before that (door command transmission request 2 is set). Error command, return command or setting start command is transmitted with priority.

  When a command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the stored command. However, this is not the case when door command transmission is requested while waiting for transmission of commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer (during delay). After the command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the door command is transmitted. If an untransmitted command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. Specifically, in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is converted to a positive logic. Open detection switch 25ON = 1, 0 is acquired when the door is closed, and the timer interrupt process (main) timer interrupt 2 is performed, that is, in the door monitoring process performed every 2.24 ms, in the port input process described above The acquired state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 (the input state that has been the same for two consecutive times) continues to be logically ORed for about 100 ms (45 times of door monitoring processing), and the door opening detection switch is used using the result. 25 detection states are determined. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When the main CPU 41a determines that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a also updates the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. Further, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a updates the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  As described above, the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 is updated by linking to the door command transmission command.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door command is given priority over other commands, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed in the same manner as other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Approximately 72 ms is required until the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted, but the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If it is shorter than about 72 ms required to transmit a command, when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 continuously changes, the command is normally stored in the command transmission buffer while the change continues. Since the command will not be transmitted, the buffer for normal command transmission may overflow A. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is about 100 ms, which is longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. Is set. Thus, even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 continuously changes, the door command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer after the door command is transmitted and before the next door command is transmitted. At least one command can be transmitted, and the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, and stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as operation switches for the main CPU 41a to control the progress of the game.

  The operation of these switches is not always related to the progress control of the game in all control states constituting from the end of the game to the end of the next game, but is related to the progress control of the game according to the control state. Sometimes it may not be involved.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game, the operation of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the start switch 7 is involved in the progress control of the game and is stopped. The operation of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R is not involved in the game progress control. Furthermore, even in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, the bet number has not reached the specified number, that is, the bet number can be further added, and the game start condition is In a state where it is not established, the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is involved in the game progress control, but the operation of the start switch 7 is not involved in the game progress control, while the bet number is defined. In the state where the number has been reached, that is, in the state where the bet number cannot be added and the game start condition is satisfied, the operation of the start switch 7 is involved in the game progress control. 5. The operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not related to the progress control of the game.

  In the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is involved in the game progress control, and the operation of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the start switch 7 Not involved in progress control. Furthermore, even in the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, if all the reels are rotating, all the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are involved in the progress control of the game. In the stop state, only the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel among the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is involved in the progress control of the game, and the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel is the game switch. Not involved in progress control. In this embodiment, even if any of the reels is rotating, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R may be controlled to be frozen for a certain period, but in this frozen state, All the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not involved in the progress control of the game.

  The control state in the present invention is not limited to the control state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game, or the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, but from the end of the game (after changing the setting). In the control state up to the start, the bet number has not reached the specified number, that is, the bet number can be further added and the game start condition is not satisfied, the bet number has reached the specified number A control state in which the number of bets cannot be added and a game start condition is satisfied, a control state in which all reels are rotating among control states from the start of the game to the end of the game, left Control state in which only the reel is stopped, Control state in which only the middle reel is stopped, Control state in which only the right reel is stopped, Control state in which the left and middle reels are stopped, Left and right reels Sealed and has control state, right, control state middle reel is stopped, the wait period state, applicable also for each of the states of the payout period medal. Furthermore, even if the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is not involved in the progress control of the game in the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game, the specified number of bets has already been obtained. The control state in which the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is not related to the progress control of the game because it is set, and the specified number of bets has not been set yet, but no credit remains. In other words, it can be said that the control state is different from the control state in which the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is not related to the progress control of the game.

  In the setting change state, the operation of the start switch 7 is involved in the change control of the setting value, and the operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not involved in the game progress control. Even in the setting change state, the operation of the start switch 7 is involved in the change control of the set value before the set value is determined. However, after the set value is determined, all the operation switches Not involved in change control. Further, in the setting confirmation state, any operation of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is not involved in the game progress control.

  The main CPU 41a performs a switch input determination process that is executed during a timer interruption process (main) that is executed by interrupting an operation switch that is involved in the progress control of the game according to the control state among these operation switches at regular time intervals. 1 to detect. In the switch input determination process 1, the detection state of the operation switch is monitored, and a switch-on flag indicating that the corresponding operation switch has been detected when it is changed from OFF to ON is set. In the basic process, it is determined whether or not there is a switch-on flag of an operation switch involved in the game progress control. If it is determined that the switch-on flag is set, the switch-on flag is cleared and the operation switch In addition to performing game progress control in accordance with the operation, a command (BET command, internal winning command, reel stop command, etc.) associated with the game progress control is stored in a command transmission buffer. The command stored in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the command transmission process in the timer interrupt process (main) executed thereafter.

  On the other hand, the main CPU 41a detects, in the switch input determination process 2 executed during the timer interrupt process (main), an operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control according to the control state. In the switch input determination process 2, the detection state of the operation switch is monitored, and the edge data (hereinafter referred to as a rising edge) indicating that the corresponding operation switch has changed from OFF to ON when the change from OFF to ON is set. Then, edge data (hereinafter referred to as a falling edge) indicating that the corresponding operation switch has changed from ON to OFF when it changes from ON to OFF is set. In the basic process, it is determined if the rising edge or the falling edge of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control is determined and it is determined that the rising edge or the falling edge is set. Processing for clearing the rising edge or falling edge and storing an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control has changed in the command transmission buffer is performed. The operation detection command stored in the trust buffer is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the command transmission process in the timer interrupt process (main) executed thereafter.

  In this embodiment, in the switch input determination process 1, not only the operation switches involved in the game progress control according to the control state but also the operation switch operations not involved in the game progress control are detected. Although the on flag is set, even if the switch on flag indicating the operation of the operation switch not related to the progress control of the game is set, it is ignored in the basic processing, so that the operation of the operation switch is not related to the progress control of the game. In the configuration, the switch input determination process 1 detects only the operation of the operation switch involved in the game progress control according to the control state, and does not detect the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control itself. It is also good.

  In the present embodiment, not only the operation switch not related to the game progress control according to the control state in the switch input determination process 2 but also the operation of the operation switch related to the game progress control is detected. Data (rising edge or falling edge) is set, but even if edge data indicating the operation of the operation switch related to the game progress control is set, the operation of the operation switch related to the game progress control is performed in the basic processing. In this configuration, only the edge data indicating the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control is monitored, but the switch input determination process 2 does not participate in the game progress control according to the control state. Only the operation switch operation is detected, and the operation switch operation involved in the game progress control itself is detected. No structure and then, when the edge data is set may be the operation of the operation switch where the edge data is shown to send the identifiable operation detection command.

  In this embodiment, the operation switch and the game progress involved in the game progress control in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game and the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game. The operation switches that are not involved in the control are different, and the main CPU 41a, in the former control state, does not involve the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the progress control of the game. When an operation of 8C, 8R is detected, an operation detection command capable of specifying the fact is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a, while in the latter control state, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7 Of the operation switches that are not involved in the progress control of the game and are not involved in the progress control of the game. When an operation of the BET switch 6 is detected, an operation detection command capable of specifying the fact is transmitted, and the sub CPU 91a operates an operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control in each control state. An effect can be executed when an operation detection command is received that can identify the fact that has been detected.

  That is, the main CPU 41a does not participate in the game progress control in one control state among the plurality of control states, but detects the operation switch operation involved in the game progress control in the other control state in the one control state. In addition, an operation detection command that can specify that is transmitted, and in the other control state, the control of the operation switch that is involved in the game progress control in one control state is not involved in the game control in the other control state. When the operation is detected, an operation detection command that can specify the fact is transmitted, and the sub CPU 91a detects the operation that can be specified that the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control is detected in each control state. When the command is received, the effect can be executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in any of the plurality of control states, an effect can be executed in accordance with the operation of the operation switch not related to the game progress control. It is possible to make effective use of the corresponding performance, and the operation switch for performing the performance changes according to the control state, so that the game does not become monotonous and the operation of the performance can be changed. , Can effectively enhance interest.

  In addition, since an operation switch that is not used in the progress control of the game in one control state is used as a trigger for the production in the other control state, each operation switch that is not used in the progress control of a different game in a plurality of control states Can be used effectively.

In this embodiment, not only the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game and the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, but also in both control states progress when the control detects the operation of the operation switch which is not involved in the, and transmits the detection of possible specific operation detection command to the sub CPU91a, sub CPU91a is not involved in the progress control of the game in each control state When an operation detection command that can specify that the operation of the operation switch has been detected is received, the production can be performed, the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, the game from the start of the game Operation switches that do not participate in the game progress control in both control states as well as one of the control states until the end. It is possible to perform the production to take advantage of the operation.

  In this embodiment, in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is not always involved in the progress control of the game is detected during this time. An operation detection command that can specify that fact is transmitted. In the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 that is not always involved in the progress control of the game is detected during this time. An operation detection command that can specify that is sent when the game ends, but the number of bets in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game is less than the specified number, and the start switch When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state in which the operation of 7 is not related to the progress control of the game, the bet number becomes the specified number and 1 When the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is detected in a state where the operation of the ET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is not involved in the game progress control, any of the control states from the start of the game to the end of the game When the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel is detected in a state where the reel is stopped and the operation of the corresponding stop switch is not involved in the game progress control, the game is not always involved in the game progress control in the control state. Not only operation switches, but also operation switch operations that are not involved in game progress control depending on the situation are detected in a state not involved in game progress control, an operation detection command that can specify that fact is sent. The sub CPU 91a receives these operation detection commands. To, may be capable of executing the production configuration.

  In the switch input determination process 1 for detecting the operation of the operation switch involved in the progress control of the game, when the detection state of the operation switch changes from OFF to ON, the detection state of the other operation switch is not ON. The switch-on flag of the changed operation switch is set. If the other operation switch is ON, the switch-on flag is not set. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, when the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 changes from OFF to ON in the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game, the detection state of the other operation switches changes. If it is ON, the switch ON flag of the MAXBET switch 6 is not set. Thereafter, when the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 changes from OFF to ON while the detection state of the other operation switches is OFF, the MAXBET switch 6 The switch-on flag is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, when the detection state of the stop switch changes from OFF to ON, the stop switch is detected if the detection state of other operation switches is ON. The switch-on flag is not set, and then the switch-on flag of the stop switch is set when the detection state of the stop switch changes from OFF to ON with the detection state of the other operation switches turned OFF. It has become.

  On the other hand, in the switch input determination process 2 for detecting the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control, when the operation switch detection state changes from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF, another operation is performed. Even when the switch detection state is ON, the rising edge or falling edge of the changed operation switch is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 14, when the detection state of the stop switch changes from OFF to ON in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, the detection state of other operation switches is ON. Even when the rising edge of the stop switch where the detection state has changed is set and the detection state of the stop switch has changed from ON to OFF, even if the detection state of other operation switches is ON, the detection state The falling edge of the stop switch in which is changed is set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, when the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 changes from OFF to ON in the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, even if the detection state of the other operation switches is ON. When the rising edge of the MAXBET switch 6 is set and the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 changes from ON to OFF, the falling edge of the MAXBET switch 6 is set even if the detection state of other operation switches is ON. It has come to be.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the switch input determination process 1 for detecting the operation of the operation switch related to the game progress control, when the operation switch related to the game progress control is operated, The operation of the operation switch involved in the game progress control is detected on the condition that it is not operated, and when the other operation switch is operated, the operation involved in the game progress control is detected. Even if the switch is operated, it is not detected. For this reason, even when a plurality of operation switches including operation switches involved in the game progress control are operated at the same time, operations of the operation switches involved in the game progress control among these operation switches are detected. The game progress control according to the operation of the operation switch involved in the game progress control by detecting the operation of the plurality of operation switches including the operation switch involved in the game progress control at the same time, and other Since a process such as setting a priority between the control according to the operation of the operation switch is not required, it is possible to simplify the game progress control associated with the detection of the operation switch involved in the game progress control. .

  On the other hand, in the switch input determination process 2 for detecting the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control, even when another operation switch is operated when the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is operated. The operation of the operation switch not related to the game progress control is detected. For this reason, when an operation switch that does not affect the progress control of the game is operated, the operation of the operation switch is detected even if it is operated simultaneously with other operation means, and the operation of the operation switch can be specified Since the detection command is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a, the sub CPU 91a can reliably execute an effect associated with the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control.

  In this embodiment, in the switch input determination process 1, when the control state related to the progress control of the game is operated regardless of whether the control state is the BET process or the reel rotation process, other operation switches The operation of the operation switch related to the game progress control is detected on the condition that it is not operated, but the operation switch related to the game progress control is operated in at least one of the control states. If the operation switch operation involved in the game progress control is detected on the condition that no other operation switch is operated, the game control in the corresponding control state is involved. It is possible to simplify the progress control of the game associated with the detection of the operation switch to be performed. Only in one of the control states, when an operation switch related to the game progress control is operated, the operation switch operation related to the game progress control is operated on the condition that no other operation switch is operated. In other control states, when an operation switch related to the game progress control is operated, an operation switch related to the game progress control is operated even if the other operation switch is operated. The operation may be detected.

  In the present embodiment, in the switch input determination process 2 for detecting the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control, the operation switch detection state is monitored, and the operation switch detection state has changed from OFF to ON. Or, only when it detects that the detection state has changed from ON to OFF, that is, the detection state has changed, and the change in the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress is detected, the corresponding operation switch changes from OFF to ON. An operation detection command indicating that a change has been made or changed from ON to OFF is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the transmission of the operation detection command indicating that the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is operated as much as possible, and it is possible to reduce the control load related to the transmission of the operation detection command. The side does not need to receive an operation detection command more than necessary.

  In addition, not only when the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control changes from OFF to ON, but also when the detection state changes from ON to OFF, an operation detection command indicating the change is transmitted. On the CPU 91a side, it is possible to specify in real time the detection state of the operation switch that does not participate in the game progress control. It is possible to perform different performances according to the timings that have been performed and the operations that have not been released for a certain period of time, or to change the start timing and end timing of the performances. Various productions can be performed accordingly.

  In the present embodiment, it is detected that the detection state of the operation switches not involved in the game progress control has changed from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF, and the operation switches not involved in the game progress control are detected. When a change in the state is detected, an operation detection command for specifying the detection state after the change is transmitted, but the detection state of the operation switch not related to the progress control of the game is changed from OFF to ON. An operation detection command that can identify the operation of the corresponding operation switch is transmitted when only a change is detected and a change from OFF to ON is detected, or an operation that is not involved in game progress control Only the fact that the switch detection state has changed from ON to OFF is detected, and when the fact that the switch has changed from ON to OFF is detected, the corresponding operation switch An operation detection command that can identify an operation may be transmitted. With such a configuration, an operation detection command that indicates that an operation switch that is not involved in game progress control is operated can be transmitted. Further, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the transmission of the operation detection command, and it is possible to reduce the operation detection command received on the sub CPU 91a side.

  In this embodiment, the operation switch is operated both when the main CPU 41a detects the operation of the operation switch involved in the game progress control and when the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is detected. A command that can specify that the game has been performed, but when an operation of an operation switch that is involved in game progress control is detected, or when an operation switch operation that is not involved in game progress control is detected. It is designed to send different types of commands. Specifically, when the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected in a control state in which the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is involved in the game progress control, a BET command is transmitted, and the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is involved in the game progress control. When the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected in the non-control state, an operation detection command is transmitted. Further, when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected in the control state in which the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is involved in the progress control of the game, a reel stop command is transmitted, and the stop switches 8L, 8L, When the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected in a control state in which the operation of 8C, 8R is not involved in the game progress control, an operation detection command is transmitted.

  Both the BET command and the operation detection command indicating that the MAXBET switch 6 has been operated are commands that can specify that the MAXBET switch 6 has been operated. However, the type data indicating the type of the command is different, and the sub CPU 91 a Even if the commands indicate that the same MAXBET switch 6 has been operated, whether the MAXBET switch 6 has been operated in a control state in which the command is involved in the progress control of the game due to the difference in type data. It is possible to determine whether the MAXBET switch 6 has been operated in a control state that is not involved in the control.

  The reel stop command and the operation detection command indicating that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated are commands that can specify that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. Even if the sub CPU 91a is a command indicating that the same stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R is operated, the sub CPU 91a performs control related to the progress control of the game depending on the type data. It is possible to determine whether the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in the state, or whether the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in the control state not related to the game progress control.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a differs between the case where the operation switch operation involved in the game progress control is detected and the case where the operation switch operation not involved in the game progress control is detected. When the command indicating that the operation switch is operated is received, the sub CPU 91a is operated in a state related to the progress control of the game due to the difference in the type. It is possible to determine whether the operation is performed in a state not related to the progress control of the game, and when the command indicating that the operation switch is operated is received, the operation indicated by the command from the preceding and following commands, etc. It is not necessary to specify whether or not the operation of the switch is related to the progress control of the game.

  Further, the main CPU 41a transmits different types of commands when an operation of an operation switch involved in the game progress control is detected and when an operation of an operation switch not involved in the game progress control is detected. However, even when a BET command or a reel stop command that can specify an operation of an operation switch that is involved in the game progress control is transmitted, an operation detection command that can specify an operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control Are transmitted in the order in which they are stored in the common normal command transmission buffer and stored in the normal command transmission buffer by common command transmission processing. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the operation detection command in the work area of the RAM 41c separately from the normal command transmission buffer, so that the work area for the main CPU 41a to perform operations can be reduced and operation detection can be performed. Since the process for sending commands is shared with other commands, the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, when the error command is stored in the special command transmission buffer, the main CPU 41a, as a rule, transmits the normal command even if a command generated earlier is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. Error commands are sent with priority over commands stored in the buffer. In addition, when a door command is stored in the door command transmission buffer, in principle, even if a command generated earlier is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, it is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command is given priority over the current command.

  For this reason, even if the operation switch operation not involved in the game progress control is detected and the operation detection command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the error command or door command based on the event that occurred after that has priority. Since it is transmitted, it is possible to prevent the error notification and the door opening notification from being delayed on the side of the sub CPU 91a due to the influence of the operation not related to the progress control of the game.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, if the number of bets is less than the specified number in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the start switch 7 is performed. If the number of bets has reached the specified number without being involved in the game progress control, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the single BET switch 5, and the MAXBET switch 6 is not involved in the game progress control. The main CPU 41a detects the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R among the operation switches that are not involved in the progress control of the game in the BET process that constitutes the basic process in the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game. Only the presence or absence of a rising edge or a falling edge indicating a change in state is determined, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8 When it is determined that a rising edge or falling edge indicating a change in the detection state is set, an operation detection command indicating the rising edge or falling edge of the corresponding stop switch is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. . As a result, when the detection state of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are not involved in the progress control of the game changes in the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game, the corresponding stop switch is given to the sub CPU 91a. The operation detection command indicating the rising edge or the falling edge of is transmitted.

  On the other hand, in the BET process, the presence or absence of a rising edge or a falling edge indicating a change in the detection state of the operation switches other than the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R among the operation switches not involved in the game progress control is not determined. Even if a rising edge or a falling edge indicating a change in the detection state of the operation switches other than the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R not related to the progress control of the game is set, the rising edge or the falling edge of the corresponding operation switch is set. The operation detection command shown is not stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, even if a rising edge or a falling edge indicating a change in the detection state of the operation switches other than the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are not involved in the progress control of the game is set, the operation detection command is not transmitted. Absent.

  If the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game is not the freeze state, the operation of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel is involved in the progress control of the game. In the frozen state, the operation of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is not involved in the progress control of the game. In the reel rotation process that constitutes the basic process in the control state up to the end of the game, only the presence or absence of a rising edge or a falling edge indicating a change in the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 among the operation switches not involved in the progress control of the game is determined. The detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 When the rising or falling edge shows a change is determined to be set, and stores the operation detection command indicating rising or falling edge of MAXBET switch 6 to the normal command transmit buffer. As a result, when the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 not involved in the game progress control changes in the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, an operation indicating the rising edge or the falling edge of the MAXBET switch 6 is performed on the sub CPU 91a. A detection command will be transmitted.

  On the other hand, in the reel rotation process, the presence or absence of a rising edge or a falling edge indicating a change in the detection state of the operation switches other than the MAXBET switch 6 among the operation switches not involved in the game progress control is not determined. Even if a rising edge or a falling edge indicating a change in the detection state of an operation switch other than the MAXBET switch 6 not involved in the progress control is set, an operation detection command indicating a rising edge or a falling edge of the corresponding operation switch is a normal command. It is not stored in the transmission buffer. For this reason, even if a rising edge or a falling edge indicating a change in the detection state of the operation switches other than the MAXBET switch 6 not involved in the progress control of the game is set, the operation detection command is not transmitted.

  Thus, in this embodiment, even when there are a plurality of operation switches that are not involved in the game progress control in a certain control state, the operation of the corresponding operation switch is performed only when the operation of a specific operation switch is detected. An operation detection command that can be specified is transmitted, and even if an operation switch not involved in the progress control of the game is operated, the operation detection command is not transmitted unless it is a specific operation switch. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the transmission of the operation detection command indicating that the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is operated as much as possible, and it is possible to reduce the control load related to the transmission of the operation detection command. The side does not need to receive an operation detection command more than necessary.

  In this embodiment, in the switch input determination process 2, changes in the detection state are detected for all the operation switches, and when detected, the rising edge or the falling edge of the corresponding operation switch is set. In the basic processing, it is determined whether a rising edge or a falling edge is set only for a specific operation switch among the operation switches that are not involved in the game progress control, and the rising edge or the falling edge of the specific operation switch is An operation detection command is transmitted only when a specific operation switch is operated among a plurality of operation switches not involved in the game progress control by transmitting an operation detection command only when it is determined that it is set. In the switch input determination process 2, all operation switches are detected. Instead of detecting a change in state, a change in the detection state is monitored only for a specific operation switch among the operation switches not involved in the game progress control, and when that change is detected, a rising edge or a falling edge is detected. Even if a configuration is used to send an operation detection command indicating a change in the detection state of a corresponding operation switch when a rising edge or falling edge is set, an operation detection command other than a specific operation switch is sent. Since it is not necessary to transmit the operation detection command, it is possible to reduce the transmission of the operation detection command indicating that the operation switch not related to the game progress control is operated, and it is possible to reduce the control load related to the transmission of the operation detection command. In addition, the sub CPU 91a does not need to receive an operation detection command more than necessary.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is transmitted only when a specific operation switch is operated among a plurality of operation switches not related to the game progress control. The operation detection command may be transmitted when each of the plurality of operation switches that are not operated is operated. With such a configuration, the sub CPU 91a can operate the operation switches that are not involved in the game progress control on the side. It can be used to produce a variety of effects.

  In this embodiment, a switch-on flag is set to indicate that an operation of an operation switch involved in game progress control is detected regardless of whether or not a command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer in the basic processing. If it is determined that the switch-on flag is set, a command that can specify that the operation switch indicated by the switch-on flag has been operated is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, when it is determined that the switch-on flag is set in the timer interrupt process (main) and the switch-on flag is set in the basic process after the return, the normal command transmission buffer is set. Even if the command is stored, the command that can specify the operation of the operation switch indicated by the switch-on flag at that time is stored in the normal command transmission buffer.

  On the other hand, only in the case where it is determined whether or not the normal command transmission buffer is empty in the basic process, and it is determined that the normal command transmission buffer is empty, the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is performed. An operation switch indicated by a rising edge or a falling edge when it is determined whether a rising edge or a falling edge indicating detection is set and it is determined that a rising edge or a falling edge is set. An operation detection command that can specify that an operation has been performed is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, when a rising edge or a falling edge is set in the timer interrupt process (main), if the command is not stored in the normal command transmission buffer in the basic process after returning, The operation detection command that can specify the operation of the operation switch indicated by the rising edge or the falling edge at that time is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, but when the command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, At that time, the operation detection command is not stored, and the operation detection command that can specify the operation of the operation switch indicated by the rising edge or the falling edge when the normal command transmission buffer becomes empty is stored.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the BET command and the reel stop control command transmitted when the operation of the operation switch related to the game progress control is detected are not related to the game progress control. The operation detection command transmitted when the switch operation is detected is also stored in a common normal command transmission buffer, and these commands are transmitted in the stored order. In addition, the command transmission process is performed only once every four times of the timer interrupt process (main). Further, in the single command transmission process, only the command stored at the earliest stage is transmitted. When a plurality of commands are stored in the trust buffer, the last command stored is the fastest because the command transmission processing execution interval is 2.24 ms, where n is the number of commands stored. However, it is not transmitted until the time of (2.24 × n) elapses. In such a case, there is a possibility that the transmission timing of the last stored command may be greatly delayed.

  On the other hand, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the normal command transmission buffer is empty in the basic processing, and only when it is determined that the normal command transmission buffer is empty, the main CPU 41a does not participate in the game progress control. It is determined whether a rising edge or a falling edge indicating that a switch operation has been detected is set, and when it is determined that a rising edge or a falling edge is set, a rising edge or a falling edge The operation detection command that can specify that the operation switch indicated by is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, and when it is determined that the normal command transmission buffer is not empty, the rising edge or falling edge is set. The operation detection command is not stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, even when operation switches not involved in the game progress control are continuously operated, a plurality of operation detection commands are not stored in the normal command transmission buffer, and a plurality of operation detection commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer. As a result of the accumulation, it is possible to prevent the transmission of a command indicating that an operation switch involved in the game progress control has been operated from being greatly delayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the normal command transmission buffer is empty in the basic process, and only when it is determined that the normal command transmission buffer is empty, the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control is determined. By determining whether a rising edge or falling edge indicating that an operation has been detected is set, the operation detection command is stored only when the normal command transmission buffer is empty. In the basic process, it is determined whether or not a rising edge or a falling edge indicating that an operation of an operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control is detected, and the rising edge or the falling edge is set. If it is determined, it is determined whether the normal command transmission buffer is empty, and if it is determined that the normal command transmission buffer is empty. As long as the operation detection command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the operation detection command may be stored only when the normal command transmission buffer is empty. The same effect can be obtained.

  In addition, when the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is detected in the switch input determination process 2, it is determined whether or not the normal command transmission buffer is empty, and the normal command transmission buffer is empty. Only when it is determined, the rising edge or the falling edge is set so that the operation detection command is stored only when the normal command transmission buffer is empty, or the switch input determination processing 2 is used for normal command transmission. Only when it is determined whether or not the buffer is empty and it is determined that the normal command transmission buffer is empty, the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is monitored, and the normal command transmission buffer is not empty. If there is no operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control, the normal command transmission buffer is not monitored. § well have a structure in which only the operation detection command if the air is stored, the same effect as also above a these configurations can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the rising edge or falling edge set in a state where an untransmitted command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer is maintained until the normal command transmission buffer becomes empty. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, it is determined that the rising edge or the falling edge is set, and at that time, the operation detection command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. By clearing the rising edge or falling edge that is set when the unsent command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the game can be executed while the unsent command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The detection may be invalidated when an operation switch not involved in the progress control is detected.

  Further, in this embodiment, only when it is determined that the normal command transmission buffer is empty, regardless of the configuration in which the operation detection command is stored, that is, regardless of the type of command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, If any type of command is stored, the operation detection command is not stored, but the operation detection command is stored only when a specific type of command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. If a command other than a specific type is stored, the operation detection command may be stored. For example, the operation detection command may be stored only when the operation detection command is not stored. Even if there is no change, only when commands other than commands indicating the sensor status are stored at regular intervals May be configured to store the detection command, by these configurations, there is no possibility that the transmission of the operation detection command is delayed more than necessary.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to specify that a command that can detect that an operation of an operation switch involved in the game progress control has been detected and an operation switch operation that is not involved in the game progress control can be specified. The operation detection command is stored in the same normal command transmission buffer, but a normal command transmission for storing a command capable of specifying that an operation of an operation switch involved in the progress control of the game has been detected. In addition to the trust buffer, an operation detection command transmission buffer is provided for storing an operation detection command that can specify that an operation of an operation switch that is not involved in the progress control of the game has been detected. An operation detection command when an operation switch operation related to game progress control is detected regardless of whether the buffer is empty or not. It is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, but in the command transmission process, it is determined whether the command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer before the operation detection command transmission buffer. If a command is stored, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted, so that the operation switch operation related to the game progress control is detected rather than the operation detection command. It is also possible to prioritize the transmission of a command that can specify the game, and even in such a configuration, the operation switch that is involved in the game progress control is operated by the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control. It is possible to prevent the transmission of a command capable of specifying the fact from being greatly delayed.

  In addition to the normal command transmission buffer that stores a command that can specify that the operation of the operation switch involved in the game progress control is detected, an operation switch operation that is not involved in the game progress control is detected. An operation detection command transmission buffer for storing an operation detection command capable of specifying the effect is provided. In the command transmission process, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer and the operation detection command transmission buffer are stored. The operation detection command is transmitted alternately, or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted only once every n (n is a natural number) times. This means that the operation switch operation related to the game progress control is detected rather than the operation detection command. It may be configured to give priority to the transmission of a command that can be set, and even in such a configuration, the operation switch related to the game progress control is operated by the operation of the operation switch not related to the game progress control. It is possible to prevent the transmission of a command capable of specifying the ID from being greatly delayed.

  Even in such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the normal command transmission buffer is empty in the basic processing, and only when it is determined that the normal command transmission buffer is empty. If a command is already stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a new operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer until the command is transmitted. The operation switch operation related to the game progress control is detected during the transmission delay without being stored, and the operation switch related to the game progress control is newly operated in the normal command transmission buffer. Even when an identifiable command is stored, transmission of the command can be prevented from being delayed.

  In addition to the normal command transmission buffer that stores a command that can specify that the operation of the operation switch involved in the game progress control is detected, an operation switch operation that is not involved in the game progress control is detected. The operation detection command transmission buffer for storing the operation detection command that can specify the effect is provided, and in the command transmission processing, the first determination that determines whether or not the command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the operation detection command Of the second determinations for determining whether or not an operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer, the determination to be performed first is alternately changed every time the command is transmitted, or n (n is a natural number) ) Each time a command is sent, the second determination is performed only once before the first determination, and the other determinations are performed prior to the second determination. Therefore, it may be configured to give priority to transmission of a command that can specify that an operation of an operation switch related to the progress control of the game has been detected rather than an operation detection command. It is possible to prevent the transmission of a command that can specify that the operation switch related to the progress control of the game has been operated due to the operation of the operation switch not related to the control from being greatly delayed.

  Even in such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the normal command transmission buffer is empty in the basic processing, and only when it is determined that the normal command transmission buffer is empty. If a command is already stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a new operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer until the command is transmitted. The operation switch operation related to the game progress control is detected during the transmission delay without being stored, and the operation switch related to the game progress control is newly operated in the normal command transmission buffer. Even when an identifiable command is stored, transmission of the command can be prevented from being delayed.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the operation of the operation switch is detected in the timer interrupt process (main), and in the basic process, the control is performed until the operation of the operation switch is detected in the timer interrupt process (main). The process determined according to the state is repeated, and when the operation of the operation switch is detected, the progress of the game is controlled by gradually shifting to the next control state.

  On the other hand, the command is generated in the basic process, stored in the command transmission buffer, and transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). The command transmission process is executed only once in the timer interrupt process (main), and only one command generated and stored at the earliest stage is transmitted in one command transmission process. ing.

  Further, the switch input determination process 1 for detecting the operation of the operation switch involved in the game progress control and the switch input determination process 2 for detecting the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control are the same timer interruption process (main The operation of the operation switch involved in the game progress control and the operation switch operation not involved in the game progress are detected in the same timer interrupt process (main). There is a case.

  In such a case, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed uniformly at regular intervals, and since it is not known at which position in the basic process the operation switch involved in the game progress control in the basic process The detection of the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control may be determined before the detection of the operation of the game is determined. In this case, the operation switch involved in the game progress control may be determined. The operation detection command that can specify the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control than the command that can specify the operation is stored in the normal command transmission buffer first. The transmission of commands that can specify the operation of operation switches involved in game progress control, such as reel stop commands, is delayed, and Production is a problem that delays in accordance with the operation involved in the game progress control of the influence of operations that do not involved in the progression control of over-time.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the game progress control is performed before determining whether a rising edge or a falling edge indicating that an operation not involved in the game progress control is detected in the basic process is set. It is determined whether or not a switch-on flag indicating that an operation of the operation switch related to the game is detected is set, and a switch-on flag indicating that an operation of the operation switch related to the game progress control is detected Only when it is determined that it has not been set, it is determined whether the rising edge or falling edge is set, and if the rising edge or falling edge is set, the operation detection of the corresponding operation switch is detected. Commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer.

Thus, as shown in FIG. 19, both the operation of the operation switch involved in the game progress control and the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control are detected within the same timer interruption process (main), When both the switch-on flag and the rising edge or falling edge are set, the switch-on flag is always set before the operation detection command is set by determining that the rising edge or the falling edge is set. Is set, and the command that can specify the operation of the operation switch indicated by the switch-on flag is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, and the game is executed within the same timer interrupt processing (main). Both operation of the operation switch involved in the progress control and operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control are detected. Even when the command is detected, the command that can specify the operation of the operation switch that is always involved in the progress control of the game is not related to the operation detection command that can specify the operation of the operation switch that is not related to the progress control of the game. Will be sent. Therefore, the operation detection command that can specify the operation of the operation switch that is not related to the game progress control does not delay the transmission of the command that can specify the operation of the operation switch that is related to the game progress control. it is possible to prevent the effect corresponding to the operation to be involved in by game progress control of me to the effects of not affect operation in progress control of is delayed.

  In this embodiment, the game progress control is performed before determining whether a rising edge or a falling edge indicating that an operation not involved in the game progress control is detected in the basic process is set. It is determined whether or not a switch-on flag indicating that the operation of the operation switch involved is detected is set, and a switch-on flag indicating that the operation switch operation related to the progress control of the game is detected is set Only when it is determined that the rising edge or the falling edge is set, a command that can specify the operation of the operation switch that is involved in the progress control of the game is surely issued. Although it is a configuration that is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a prior to the operation detection command that can specify the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the progress control, In this process, it is determined whether the rising edge or the falling edge is set, and when it is determined that the rising edge or the falling edge is set, the operation of the operation switch related to the progress control of the game is performed. When it is determined whether or not the switch-on flag indicating that the operation has been detected is set, and it is determined that the switch-on flag indicating that the operation of the operation switch related to the progress control of the game has been detected is not set Only when the operation detection command of the corresponding operation switch is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the operation switch that can always specify the operation switch operation related to the game progress control is not related to the game progress control. The operation may be transmitted to the sub CPU 91a prior to the operation detection command that can specify the operation. Ku, obtained the same effect as described above even if such a configuration.

  Further, in this embodiment, before determining whether a rising edge or a falling edge indicating that an operation not involved in the game progress control has been detected is set, an operation involved in the game progress control is determined. Even when it is determined that the switch-on flag indicating that the switch operation is detected is set, the rising edge or the falling edge is maintained without being cleared, and the progress control of the game corresponding to the switch-on flag is performed. Applicable by determining that the rising edge or falling edge is set after the command that can identify the operation of the operation switch involved is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and the switch-on flag is cleared. The operation detection command that can specify the operation of the operation switch is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. If it is determined that the switch-on flag is set before determining whether the rising edge or falling edge is set, the rising edge or rising edge is cleared and involved in the game progress control. Detection of operation of the operation switch that is not performed may be invalidated.

  In this embodiment, on the condition that the special role is won, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not to control the freeze state after the game is started and before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective. Perform freeze lottery to decide. In the freeze lottery, when it is decided to control to the freeze state, whether to control the freeze state during rotation of all reels, to the freeze state at the first stop, or to the freeze state at the second stop decide.

  If the main CPU 41a decides not to control the freeze state in the freeze lottery, the rule starts rotating after the game starts, and the stop switch corresponding to each reel when all the reels rotate at a constant speed. The operations 8L, 8C, and 8R are effective as operations related to the progress control of the game. Thereafter, each time any of the stop switches is operated to stop the reel, the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel becomes invalid and becomes an operation switch not involved in the progress control of the game.

  On the other hand, if it is decided to control the freeze state in the freeze lottery, the stop corresponding to the rotating reel is started from the time when the freeze state is controlled (during all reel rotation, first stop, second stop). Even in the case of a switch, the operation of the stop switch becomes invalid, and the stop switch is controlled to be in a freeze state together with the MAXBET switch 6 so that the operation of the stop switch is not involved in the game progress control. . Then, after the fixed time has elapsed after the start of the freeze state, the freeze state is canceled, and the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel becomes valid, and the operation becomes a control state related to the progress control of the game. .

  For example, if it is determined in the freeze lottery that the frozen state is controlled at the time of the first stop, any stop switch is operated during rotation of all reels, and the corresponding reel is stopped. The stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel as well as the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is invalidated and becomes an operation not related to the progress control of the game. This operation is validated and becomes an operation related to the progress control of the game.

  In this embodiment, as described above, not only the MAXBET switch 6 but also the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operations that are not related to the progress control of the game in the freeze state. Only determines whether the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 among the MAXBET switch 6 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, and specifies that when the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected. Possible operation detection commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, and it is not determined whether or not the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Even if the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected The operation detection command that can specify this is normally stored in the command transmission buffer. Theft is not. That is, in the freeze state, only when the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 among the MAXBET switch 6 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, an operation detection command that can specify that fact is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a, Even if an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, an operation detection command that can specify that is not transmitted to the sub CPU 91a.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a instructs continuous operation of the MAXBET switch 6 in the freeze state (a period from when the freeze command is received until a certain time elapses from the start time of the freeze state indicated by the received freeze command). 6 operation is detected 10 times (when the operation detection command indicating that the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON and the operation detection command indicating that the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from ON to OFF are received 10 times. ) Freeze production to announce that the special role has been won.

  Freeze production consists of multiple types, and depending on whether BB is won or RB is won, the type of freeze production is selected, and it is highly likely that BB is won depending on the type of freeze production, It is suggested that there is a high possibility of winning. Therefore, by operating the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control in the frozen state, it is possible to guess the type of the special role that has been won, and the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control is operated. It is possible to increase motivation for things.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a freeze effect is executed according to the operation of an operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control in the freeze state, but is not involved in the game progress control in the freeze state. When the freeze effect is executed according to the operation of the operation switch involved in the progress control, the freeze state ends after a certain period of time, so it is not noticed that the freeze state has ended. The player may operate the operation switch to execute the effect. In particular, when the freeze effect is executed when the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control is operated a plurality of times in the freeze state as described above, the operation can be performed without noticing the end of the freeze state. High nature. In such a case, since the operation switch is already involved in the progress control of the game, there arises a problem that the game proceeds unintentionally by the player.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, only when the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 among the MAXBET switch 6 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected in the freeze state, an operation detection command that can specify that fact is transmitted, The sub CPU 91a performs a freeze effect only when an operation detection command that can specify the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is received in the freeze state. As a result, the operation switch that triggers the execution of the freeze effect in the freeze state is limited to the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the progress control of the game even after the freeze state ends. Without noticing, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the reel unintentionally by performing an operation to execute the freeze effect, that is, advancing the game.

  In the present embodiment, only the determination of whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 among the MAXBET switch 6 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected in the basic processing in the freeze state, and the stop switch 8L, By not determining whether or not the operation of 8C or 8R has been detected, the operation detection command that can specify the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R is not transmitted to the sub CPU 91a. The operation switch that triggers the execution of the freeze effect in the state is limited to the MAXBET switch 6 that does not participate in the game progress control even after the freeze state ends. If only the change in the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 The operation switch that triggers the execution of the freeze effect in the freeze state can control the progress of the game even after the freeze state is finished, by detecting the change in the detection state of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R. It may be limited to the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved, and even in such a configuration, the player performs an operation to execute the freeze effect without noticing that the freeze state has ended. It is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally stopping the reel, that is, advancing the game.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes the freeze effect only when the operation detection command that can specify the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 in the freeze state is received, and the operation detection that can specify the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the freeze state. Even if a command is received, the freeze effect is not executed, so that the operation switch that triggers the execution of the freeze effect in the freeze state is changed to the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control even after the freeze state ends. Even in such a configuration, the player does not intend by the player performing an operation to execute the freeze effect without noticing that the freeze state has ended. To stop the reel, that is, to advance the game It can be stopped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the freeze state, an operation detection command that can specify that only when the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 out of the MAXBET switch 6 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are invalidated is detected. The sub CPU 91a performs a freeze effect only when an operation detection command that can specify the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is received in the freeze state. For example, during the wait period, that is, the reel of the previous game The operation of the MAXBET switch 6 among the MAXBET switch 6 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a state where the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is invalidated because the wait time has not yet elapsed from the start of rotation. Only if is detected The sub CPU 91a may be configured to perform a specific effect only when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command that can specify the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 during the wait period. In this case, the operation switch that triggers execution of a specific effect during the wait period is limited to the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control even after the end of the wait period. Without noticing that the period has ended, if the player performs an operation to execute a specific performance, the player stops the reel unintentionally, that is, advances the game. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the state where the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is invalidated during the medal payout period, that is, during the payout of medals accompanying the winning of a small role or the addition of credits, the single BET switch 5 Only when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R among the MAXBET switch 6 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, an operation detection command capable of specifying the fact is transmitted, and the sub CPU 91a pays out medals. Only when an operation detection command that can specify the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is received during the period, a specific effect may be provided. In such a configuration, during the medal payout period The operation switch that triggers the execution of a specific effect during the Since the game is limited to stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are not involved in the progress control of the game, the player performs an operation to execute a specific effect without realizing that the medal payout period has ended. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally setting the bet number, that is, proceeding the game.

  Next, the structure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are fitted into the bottomed cylindrical housing member 8a and the housing member 8a. An operating portion 8b, a detecting portion 8c provided at the inner end of the accommodating member 8a in the operating portion 8b, a coil spring 8d for biasing the operating portion 8b toward the open surface of the accommodating member 8a, and a projection It mainly comprises a light sensor 8e having a light receiving part 8g for receiving the light emitted from the light part 8f and the light projecting part.

  The operation portion 8b is movable between the position shown in FIG. 20A and the position shown in FIG. 20C. When the operation portion 8b is not operated, the operation portion 8b is moved to the coil spring 8d. Therefore, the position shown in FIG. 20A is obtained. At this position, the irradiation light from the light projecting unit 8f is received by the light receiving unit 8g, and the pressing operation of the operation unit 8b is not detected by the detection sensor 8e.

  When the operation unit 8b is pressed against the bias of the coil spring 8d, the operation unit 8b moves downward in the figure, and accordingly, the detection unit 8c also moves downward in the figure. When the operation unit 8b exceeds the position shown in FIG. 20B, the irradiation light from the light projecting unit 8f is blocked by the detection unit 8c, the light receiving unit 8g does not receive light, and the detection sensor 8e causes the operation unit 8b to A pressing operation is detected.

  Further, when the operation portion 8b is pressed against the bias of the coil spring 8d to the position shown in FIG. 20C, further movement is restricted. When the pressing of the operation unit 8b is released, the operation unit 8b is urged upward in the figure by the coil spring 8d and restored to the position shown in FIG. 20B, so that the irradiation light from the light projecting unit 8f is received. The light is received by the portion 8g, and the pressing operation of the operation portion 8b is not detected by the detection sensor 8e. Then, the operation unit 8b is finally restored to the position shown in FIG.

  In the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R of the present embodiment configured as described above, when the operation unit 8b is operated without the operation unit 8b being operated, the non-operation unit 8b is not operated as shown in FIG. It takes the time of (a)-(b) from the operation position (position of FIG. 20 (a)) to the detection boundary position (position of FIG. 20 (b)) which becomes the detection boundary of the operation by the detection sensor 8e. Further, it takes time (b)-(c) until the operation unit 8b reaches the deepest position (the position shown in FIG. 20C) from the detection boundary position, and is restored from the deepest position to the detection boundary position. It takes time (c)-(b) until time (b)-(a) before restoring from the detection boundary position to the non-operation position.

  When the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R having such a structure are manually operated continuously, the operation unit 8b normally reaches the deepest position with the first operation, and then reaches the non-operation position. After the restoration, the operation unit 8b moves toward the deepest position with the next operation. Therefore, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated continuously, the first operation is performed. As the time until the next operation is detected after the detection, the time when the operation unit 8b reaches the deepest position from the detection boundary position, restores to the non-operation position, and reaches the detection boundary position again (t: on-on). In addition, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously operated, as the time from when ON is detected to when OFF is detected, after the operation unit 8b reaches the deepest position from the detection boundary position, It takes time (t: on-off) to restore to the detection boundary position, and after the operation unit 8b restores from the detection boundary position to the non-operation position as the time from when OFF is detected to when ON is detected, It takes time (t: off-on) to reach the detection boundary position again.

  Further, the MAXBET switch 6 has the same configuration as the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R described above, and when the operation unit of the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, it is the same as when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. When the operation unit is operated in a state where the operation unit is not operated, as shown in FIG. 21, the operation unit reaches the detection boundary position that becomes the detection boundary of the operation by the detection sensor, as shown in FIG. Time (a)-(b) is required, and further, time (b)-(c) is required until the operation unit reaches the deepest position from the detection boundary position, and restoration is performed from the deepest position to the detection boundary position. It takes time (c)-(b) until time (b)-(a) before restoring from the detection boundary position to the non-operation position.

  Even when the MAXBET switch 6 having such a structure is artificially continuously operated, the operation unit normally reaches the deepest position with the first operation, similarly to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. After that, after restoring to the non-operation position, the operation unit moves toward the deepest position with the next operation. Therefore, when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated continuously, the first operation is performed. The time until the next operation is detected after the operation is detected, after the operation unit reaches the deepest position from the detection boundary position, it is restored to the non-operation position and again reaches the detection boundary position (t: on-on). Further, when the MAXBET switch 6 is continuously operated, the time from when ON is detected to when OFF is detected is restored to the detection boundary position after the operation unit reaches the deepest position from the detection boundary position. Time (t: on-off), and the time from when the OFF is detected to when the ON is detected, the operation unit restores from the detection boundary position to the non-operation position and then reaches the detection boundary position again. Time (t: off-on) is required.

  Note that the MAXBET switch 6 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R do not have the same structure, and accordingly, the time for the above operation is not exactly the same.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a transmits a command to the effect control board 90 for a certain period of time in order to prevent an effect that assists the eye-opening on the effect control board 90 side. In this range, the command transmission timing is randomly delayed. A long maximum delay time is preferable to reliably prevent an effect that assists the presentation on the effect control board 90 side, but in this embodiment, the command transmission is delayed. The operation detection command is generated each time an operation switch that is not involved in the progress control of the game is operated, and is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. A large number of commands are normally stored in the command transmission buffer, and after that, when an operation switch related to the progress control of the game is operated and a command capable of specifying that is generated, the command is Since the operation detection commands that have been accumulated up to this point are all transmitted, the operation switches that are involved in the game progress control Transmission of possible commands is significantly delayed resulting fear.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is released, the operation unit 8b is restored from the deepest position to the detection boundary position as shown in FIG. More than the time (t: on-off) required for the time from when ON is detected to when OFF is detected when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are continuously operated, (t: on-off) The time is set to be shorter than the short time, and the time (t3) until the operation unit 8b is restored from the detection boundary position to the non-operation position when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is released, that is, When the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in succession, it is longer than the time (t: off-on) required from when OFF is detected to when ON is detected. It is set to be shorter than the short time. Further, the maximum delay time of the command is the time (t2) until the operation unit is restored from the deepest position to the detection boundary position when the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is released, that is, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated continuously. In this case, a time shorter than a time (t: on-off) required from when ON is detected to when OFF is detected is set, and the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is canceled. Time (t3) until the operation unit is restored from the detection boundary position to the non-operation position, that is, the time required from when OFF is detected to when ON is detected when the MAXBET switch 6 is continuously operated ( The time is set to be shorter than the time shorter than t: off-on).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or the detection of the MAXBET switch 6 in a control state in which the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not involved in the game progress control. When the state changes and an operation detection command indicating that fact is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, it is always transmitted to the sub CPU 91a within the maximum delay time from that point.

  For this reason, in the control state where the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not involved in the game progress control, the detection state of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 is OFF. When the operation detection command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer by changing from ON to ON, the stored operation detection command indicates that the detection state of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 is The command is always transmitted before the next operation detection command is stored after changing from ON to OFF, and even when the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated continuously, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detection status or MAXBET switch Before the operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the switch has changed from OFF to ON is transmitted, the detection state of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from ON to OFF. Is not stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The stored operation is also detected when the detection state of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 changes from ON to OFF and the operation detection command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The detection command is always transmitted before the detection state of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 changes from OFF to ON and the next operation detection command is stored. An operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R or the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from ON to OFF even when the 8L, 8C, 8R or MAXBET switch 6 is operated continuously. Before the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. State or detection state MAXBET switch 6 is prevented from operation detection command indicating that changes from OFF to ON is stored in the normal command transmit buffer.

  As a result, even when operation switches not involved in the game progress control are operated continuously, a plurality of operation detection commands that can specify the operation switch operations are not accumulated due to a delay in transmission timing. By storing a plurality of operation detection commands, it is possible to prevent the transmission of commands that can specify the operation of the operation switch involved in the game progress control from being greatly delayed.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum delay time of the command is defined as the time (t2) until the operation unit restores from the deepest position to the detection boundary position when the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is released. By setting the time shorter than the time (t3) until the operation unit restores from the detection boundary position to the non-operation position when the operation of the operation switch not related to the game progress control is released, the game progress control is performed. Even when operation switches that are not involved in the operation are continuously operated, it is configured to prevent a plurality of operation detection commands from accumulating due to a delay in transmission timing, but when the operation is released, the operation unit is at the deepest position. From the detection boundary position to the non-operation position when the operation is released (t2) However, by using the operation switch set longer than the maximum delay time of the command as an operation switch not involved in the progress control of the game, it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation detection commands from being accumulated due to a delay in transmission timing. Even in such a configuration, since a plurality of operation detection commands are accumulated, the transmission of commands that can specify the operation of the operation switch related to the progress control of the game is greatly delayed. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is transmitted every time the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control changes, but the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is changed from OFF. If the configuration is such that the operation detection command is transmitted only when the operation detection command is changed or the detection state of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control is changed from ON to OFF, The time (t1) until the maximum delay time is restored from the deepest position to the non-operation position of the operation portion of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control, that is, the first operation is detected and the next operation is detected. It is only necessary to set a time shorter than the time shorter than the time (t: on-on or t: off-off shown in FIG. 21). When the operation switch that is not involved in the progression control is operated continuously, it becomes possible to prevent the operation detection command will accumulate more by the delay of the transmission timing.

  Also, only when the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control changes from OFF to ON, the configuration for transmitting the operation detection command or the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control changes from ON to OFF. If only the operation detection command is transmitted, the time (t1) until the operation unit of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is restored from the deepest position to the non-operation position is the command maximum delay time. The operation switch set longer than that may be used as an operation switch that is not involved in the progress control of the game, thereby preventing a plurality of operation detection commands from being accumulated due to a delay in transmission timing. Game progress control by collecting multiple operation detection commands Transmission of specific possible commands the operation of the operation switch involved can be prevented from significantly delayed.

  Also, in this embodiment, by defining the relationship between the time required for operating the operation switch not involved in the game progress control and the maximum delay time of the command, a plurality of operation detection commands are accumulated due to a delay in transmission timing. For example, the progress of the game, such as setting the execution interval of the operation switch that does not participate in the progress control of the game or the detection of the change in the detection state to be longer than the maximum delay time of the command. By setting the time required to detect the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the control or the detection state change to be longer than the maximum delay time of the command, it is possible to avoid a plurality of operation detection commands from being accumulated due to a delay in transmission timing. It is good also as a structure.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In this embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is not received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. It is read by the timer interrupt process (sub), and a plurality of unprocessed commands are not accumulated in the reception buffer. When a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the timer interrupt process performed first after that The command received by (sub) is read and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52 , the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 , etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Referring to the control pattern corresponding to the received command type, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. An effect based on the control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when an operation for setting the number of bets is performed during execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the number of bets has been set, the effect being executed is canceled. It is supposed to be. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. It is designed not to be overwhelmed. In the case of controlling the bet number setting operation, credits, and bet amount adjustment operation to be disabled (BET freeze state) during the performance, the bet number setting operation and the adjustment operation are performed during that time. Even if the operation is performed, the BET command or the payout start command is not transmitted, and as a result, the effect that is being executed is not canceled in accordance with these operations.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. When the freeze command is received, the performance pattern is selected with a probability corresponding to whether the internal lottery result indicated by the internal winning command received immediately before indicates BB winning or RB winning. Are set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and the sub CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery when receiving the internal winning command or the freeze command. With reference to the selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game.

Sub CPU91a In this embodiment, based on the reception of the door commands, performing the door open notification indicating that the front door 1 b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even if a door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even when the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door opening notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door opening notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door opening) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door is open until then. Knowledge is not performed, and if the finalized detection state is OFF (door closed), door opening notification is not performed, the determined detection state if the ON (open door), and starts a door opening notification.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the front door 1 b is opened, therefore the fact is notified, it is possible to prevent such illegal effectively, can be detected early be made illegal .

Further, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, it only transmits a door command indicating the detection state after the change. , determined from the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 whether front door 1 b is opened is not performed, the sub CPU91a the sub controller 91, the door opening detection switch 25 shown is a door command received from the main CPU41a a judgment of whether the front door 1 b is opened based on the detected state, and performs the door opening notification based on the determination result. Therefore, the main CPU41a is, in order to notify the opening of the front door 1 b, determined from the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 whether front door 1 b is open (chattering preventing determination of a door opening detection switch 25 Etc.) and the control load on the main CPU 41a can be reduced.

  Even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game is over. Therefore, even when the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can be always acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a rule, receives a normal command when a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) while the command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in the transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 and the transmission interval of the door command are transmitted. The error can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the state of waiting for transmission of commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer (delayed), commands that are delayed are given priority over door commands, and the delay time is already measured. Even though it has started, interrupting it does not complicate delay control. The error command, the return command, and the setting start command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. The door command is not updated, and even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes while waiting for transmission of an error command, return command or setting start command, the door command is not transmitted yet is overwritten. Can be prevented.

  Also, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the command transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process. When storing door commands and other commands in the same command transmission buffer, interrupts are stored when other commands are stored in the command transmission buffer. (If a door command is stored while another command is being stored in the command transmission buffer, the command being processed will be overwritten, and after returning, there will be additional door commands. (There is a problem such as being overwritten partially), in such a configuration, interrupts are stored every time another command is stored This may affect other controls such as reel rotation blur and medal payout blur. However, as described above, the door command transmission buffer is separate from the normal command transmission buffer. Is stored in the command transmission buffer in the timer interrupt processing (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the door command in the basic processing, and stores other commands in the command transmission buffer in the basic processing. Even in the configuration, it is not necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing other commands, and the above-described problems can be solved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 after the door command is transmitted and before the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. It is set to about 100 ms, which is longer than about 72 ms, so that even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 continuously changes, the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. In the meantime, at least one command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  In the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91, an operation detection flag storage area in which an operation detection flag indicating that the operation state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control has changed is stored for each operation switch, and the game progress control is performed. A detection state storage area in which the change state of the detection state of the operation switch not involved is stored for each operation switch is allocated. Furthermore, the detection state storage area is assigned with a detection state before receiving the operation detection command (previous) and a detection state after receiving the operation detection command (this time). The detection state of each operation switch before and after reception is stored.

  The sub CPU 91a performs the operation detection process 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (sub) that an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. In the operation detection process 1, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command is an operation detection command, and when it is determined that the command is an operation detection command, this time stored in the detection state storage area of the operation switch indicated by the operation detection command This detection state is moved to the previous detection state, the detection state after the change indicated by the operation detection command is stored as the current detection state, and the operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch indicated by the operation detection command is set.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a change in the detection state of the operation switch not related to the progress control of the game, it is identified whether the main CPU 41a has changed from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF. When the operation detection command is transmitted, the sub CPU 91a sets an operation detection flag indicating that the detection state of the operation switch indicated by the operation detection command has changed when the operation detection command is received. The detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command stored in the detection state storage area is updated according to the change in the detection state indicated by the sub CPU 91a. By confirming that it is possible to determine that the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control has changed. Moni, by checking the detection state stored in the detection condition storing area, and to be able to determine changes how the detection state of the operation switch before and after the reception of the operation detection command.

  For this reason, the sub CPU 91a can perform an effect or change the effect according to the timing when the operation of the operation switch not related to the progress control of the game is started, as well as the timing when the operation is released. Various effects can be performed according to the operation mode of the operation switches not involved in the progress control of the game.

  In this embodiment, how the sub CPU 91a changes the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command in addition to the change in the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control. However, the main CPU 41a detects the operation only when the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control changes from OFF to ON or from OFF to ON. The sub CPU 91a may be configured to be able to determine only that the operation switch not involved in the game progress control has been operated, and with this configuration, the operation switch that does not affect the game progress control. It is possible to reduce the control load on both the main CPU 41a and the sub CPU 91a due to the operation of

  The sub CPU 91a is assigned to the RAM 91c when the operation detection command indicates that the operation detection command has changed from OFF to ON in the operation detection process 1, that is, when the operation switch operation not related to the progress control of the game has started. Among the operation time counters, the value of the operation time counter of the corresponding operation switch is initialized. The value of the operation time counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process (sub) is executed, and the operation of the operation switch not related to the game progress control by referring to the value of the operation time counter It is possible to determine the elapsed time since the start.

  The sub CPU 91a executes the operation detection process 2 every time the timer interrupt process (sub) is executed. In the operation detection process 2, it is determined for each operation switch whether or not the current detection state stored in the detection state storage area is ON, and if it is ON, that is, the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control. Is continued, the value of the operation time counter of the corresponding operation switch is referred to, and if a predetermined time has elapsed, a time elapse flag indicating that is set in association with the operation switch. . In this embodiment, a 3 second elapsed flag, a 5 second elapsed flag, and a 10 second elapsed flag are set as a time elapsed flag when 3 seconds have elapsed, 5 seconds have elapsed, and 10 seconds have elapsed.

  For this reason, the sub CPU 91a confirms whether or not the time lapse flag is set, thereby producing an effect when a certain time elapses when the operation switch not related to the progress control of the game is continuously operated. Can be done.

  In this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a change in the detection state of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control, it can identify whether the main CPU 41a has changed from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF. The operation detection command is transmitted, and the sub CPU 91a receives from the main CPU 41a the operation detection command that can specify that the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control has changed from OFF to ON. By measuring the time that has elapsed without receiving an operation detection command that can specify that the switch detection state has changed from ON to OFF, the sub CPU 91a side does not participate in the progress control of the game. It is possible to grasp the continuous operation time for each individual switch on the main CPU 41a side. It is possible to detect the continuous operation time of the operation switches that are not involved in the game progress control only by changing the program of the sub CPU 91a without having a timer, but the main CPU 41a does not participate in the game progress control. After the operation of the operation switch has changed from OFF to ON, the time elapsed without changing from ON to OFF is counted, and when this time reaches the specified time, the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is set to the specified time. By transmitting an operation detection command indicating that the operation is continuously performed, the sub CPU 91a may be able to specify that the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the progress control of the game is continuously operated. .

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a change in the detection state of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control, it is possible to specify whether it has changed from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF. The sub CPU 91a counts the number of times that the sub CPU 91a has received an operation detection command that can specify from the main CPU 41a that the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control has changed from OFF to ON. Thus, it is possible to grasp the number of times that the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is operated on the sub CPU 91a side, and the main CPU 41a side does not have a counter for counting the number of operations for each individual switch. Operation that does not participate in game progress control only by changing the program of the CPU 91a It is possible to detect the number of times the switch is operated, but the main CPU 41a counts the number of times that the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control has changed from OFF to ON, or the number of changes from ON to OFF. When the number of times reaches the specified number of times, an operation detection command indicating that the operation switch not related to the progress control of the game has been operated the specified number of times is transmitted on the sub CPU 91a side, so that the operation not related to the progress control of the game is performed. It may be possible to specify that the switch has been operated a specified number of times.

  When the sub CPU 91a determines that the operation detection command indicates that the operation detection command has changed from OFF to ON in the operation detection processing 1, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the previous state is OFF, and the previous state is not OFF. That is, after receiving the operation detection command indicating the change from OFF to ON, the operation detection command indicating the change from OFF to ON without receiving the operation detection command indicating the change from ON to OFF. Is received, the operation detection flag is cleared.

  For this reason, after receiving the operation detection command indicating the change from OFF to ON, without receiving the operation detection command indicating the change from ON to OFF, the operation detection indicating the change from OFF to ON again. When the command is received, the operation detection flag is not set, and the effect accompanying the operation of the operation switch indicated by the operation detection command is not executed.

  In this way, after receiving the operation detection command indicating the change from OFF to ON, the operation detection indicating the change from OFF to ON without receiving the operation detection command indicating the change from ON to OFF. If a command is received, there is a possibility that the operation detection command has been missed or the data has been damaged due to noise or other abnormalities, and there is a high possibility that the performance cannot be performed normally. It is possible to maintain the consistency of the production by not performing the production accompanying the reception.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a determines in the operation detection process 1 that the unprocessed command is neither an operation detection command nor a door command, that is, when an operation switch involved in the game progress control is operated and the game progresses. Then, it is determined whether or not ON is set as the current state of the detection state storage area, and if there is an operation switch that is set to ON, all the current states are updated to OFF.

  After receiving an operation detection command indicating that it has changed from OFF to ON, if an operation detection command indicating that it has changed from ON to OFF is missed, the detection status is stored even if the operation of the corresponding operation switch is released Although the current state of the area will be kept ON, the operation switches involved in the game progress control will not be detected when other operation switches are ON, and OFF After receiving the operation detection command indicating that the state has changed from ON to ON, even if the operation detection command indicating that the state has changed from ON to OFF is not received, it is involved in commands other than the operation detection command, that is, the game progress control. The fact that the command that can specify that the operation switch to be operated has been received means that the operation switch that is not involved in the progress control of the game has already been operated. In such a case, even if ON is set as the current state of the detection state storage area, the current state is updated to OFF to store the detected state. The detection state of the operation switch in the region can be matched with the actual detection state of the corresponding operation switch.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects performed by the sub CPU 91a in the present embodiment.

  The stage change is an effect for changing any stage from a plurality of types of effect stages of different types such as the background of the liquid crystal display 51 and the appearing characters, and from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game When all of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated at the same time in the control state, that is, an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the stop switch 8L has changed from OFF to ON, and the detection state of the stop switch 8C is OFF. An operation detection command indicating that the detection switch has changed from ON to OFF and an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the stop switch 8R has changed from OFF to ON are received, and any of these stop switches has been changed from ON to OFF. Started when no operation detection command is receivedDuring stage change, when any stop switch is operated, that is, when an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of any stop switch has changed from OFF to ON is received, the corresponding stop switch is set. The stage presented correspondingly is determined as a new stage.

  The setting suggestion is an effect in which the set value can be estimated from the frequency at which the sound effect is output when the stop switch is operated, the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game, and the stage change When any stop switch is operated in the state where is not executed, that is, when an operation detection command is received indicating that the detection state of any stop switch has changed from OFF to ON Sound effects are output with a probability of 1/100 to 1/120 determined as above.

  Special role winning suggestion 1 and 2 indicate the possibility of winning the special role and notify whether or not the special role has been finally won. After performing an effect instructing continuous operation of the MAXBET switch 6 in the control state from the end of the game to the end of the game, when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated 10 times, that is, the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON. This is executed when the operation detection command shown is received 10 times, and the special role winning suggestion 2 performs an effect instructing the continuous operation of the MAXBET switch 6 in the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, and then the MAXBET switch 6 Is operated 10 times, that is, an operation indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON This is executed when the outgoing command is received 10 times, and after performing the effect of instructing the long press of the MAXBET switch 6 in the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, the MAXBET switch 6 is continuously operated for 3 seconds. In other words, an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON is received, and an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from ON to OFF is not received. It is executed when 3 seconds have passed.

  The step-up effect, the invalid operation effect, and the valid operation effect are effects that suggest the possibility of winning the special role. These step-up effects, invalid operation effects, and valid operation effects will be described in detail later.

  Among the above effects, special role winning suggestion effects 1 and 2, step-up effect, invalid operation effect, and valid operation effect are related to the effect pattern selection process executed by the sub CPU 91a at the start of the game (when the internal winning command is received). Whether or not to execute is determined according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command of the game.

  The step-up effect is an effect that can be developed from effect A to effect C through effect B, and includes patterns 1 to 7 as shown in FIG.

  Pattern 1 performs stage A when the game is started (receives an internal winning command), and then does not develop into stage B and C, and at the third stop (after receiving the internal winning command, the third reel This is a pattern in which the production A is terminated when a stop command is received.

  Pattern 2 is effect A when triggered by the start operation of the game (reception of the internal winning command), and then becomes effect B at the first stop (when the reel stop command is received for the first time after receiving the internal winning command). This is a pattern in which the effect B is not developed and then the effect C is not developed, and the effect B is ended at the third stop (when the third reel stop command is received after receiving the internal winning command).

  Pattern 3 develops effect A upon the start operation of the game (reception of an internal winning command), and then develops into effect B when time T1 elapses (time T1 elapses after receiving the internal winning command) Then, the pattern does not develop into effect C, and is a pattern in which effect B is ended at the third stop (when the third reel stop command is received after receiving the internal winning command). The time T1 may be longer than the time from when the game start operation is performed and the production A is started until the reel stop operation is validated. The length is preferably longer than the player can recognize.

  Pattern 4 is effect A when triggered by the start operation of the game (reception of the internal winning command), and then becomes effect B at the first stop (when the reel stop command is received for the first time after receiving the internal winning command). It develops into production C at the second stop (when the second reel stop command is received after receiving the internal winning command), and at the third stop (after receiving the internal winning command, the third reel This is a pattern in which the production C is ended when a stop command is received.

  Pattern 5 is effect A when triggered by the start operation of the game (reception of the internal winning command), and then the effect B at the first stop (when the first reel stop command is received after receiving the internal winning command). Further, after the start of the production B, when the time T2 has elapsed (after the time T2 has elapsed after receiving the first reel stop command), the production has developed into the production C, and at the third stop (after receiving the internal winning command) This is a pattern in which the effect C is ended when the third reel stop command is received. The time T2 is the time from when the first stop operation is performed and the effect B is started until the second stop operation is detected (the time required for receiving a reel stop command after the effect B is started). However, it is preferable that the length is longer than the player can recognize that the production B has been performed.

  Pattern 6 is effect A when triggered by the start operation of the game (reception of an internal winning command), and then develops into effect B when time T1 elapses (time T1 elapses after receiving the internal winning command). Further, after the start of the production B, when the time T2 has elapsed (when the time T1 + time T2 has elapsed since the reception of the innermost winning command), the performance C is developed, and at the third stop (the reception of the internal winning command) After that, when the third reel stop command is received), the effect C is ended.

  Pattern 7 is stage A when triggered by the game start operation (reception of an internal winning command), and then develops into stage B when time T1 elapses (time T1 elapses after receiving the internal winning command). Furthermore, when the second stop (after receiving the internal winning command, the second reel stop command is received), it develops into production C, and when the third stop (after receiving the internal winning command, the third reel stops) When the command is received), the effect C is terminated.

  In the effect pattern selection process, in addition to whether or not the step-up effect is executed, any of the patterns 1 to 7 is further selected when the step-up effect is executed. Patterns 1 to 7 are selected with different probabilities depending on whether or not BB has been won, and when BB has been won. Depending on the selected pattern, BB (1)-(5) winning expectations differ.

The winning expectation degree of BB is a numerical value indicating the possibility of winning BB when a step-up effect of a certain pattern is executed. The winning probability (n) of BB (N) and the pattern M is BB ( N) When the probability P selected at the time of non-winning and the probability Q that the pattern M is selected at the time of BB winning is calculated by Qn / (P (n-1) + Qn). For example, the winning probability of BB (2) is 1/560, the selection probability of pattern 1 at the time of non-winning of BB (2) is 1/20, and the selection probability of pattern 1 at the time of winning of BB (2) is 1/10. In this case, P (n−1) = 1/20 × 559/560 and Qn = 1/10 × 1/560, and based on this, the winning expectation of BB (2) is calculated to be about 0. 0. the 36%.

  In this embodiment, the step-up effect pattern selection rate is determined so that the BB winning expectation degree for each pattern is the expectation degree shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), patterns 2 and 3 that develop from production A to production B have higher BB winning expectations than pattern 1 with production A alone, and more than patterns 1 to 3, Patterns 4 to 7 that develop from production A to production C through production B have a higher expectation expectation for BB. For this reason, BB winning can be expected as the production develops.

  Also, even if the pattern develops to the same stage, such as Patterns 2 and 3 and Patterns 4 to 7, if the opportunity to develop is different, the winning expectation degree of BB is different, and Pattern 2 that develops to production B, 3, in pattern 2 triggered by a stop operation, the winning expectation of BB (2) (3) is higher than BB (1) (4) (5), and in pattern 3 triggered by the passage of time BB (1), (4) and (5) have higher winning expectations than BB (2) and (3). Moreover, in the pattern 4 triggered by the stop operation among the patterns 4 to 7 that develop to the production C, the winning expectation degree of BB (2) (3) is higher than BB (1) (4) (5), In pattern 6 triggered by the passage of time, the winning expectations of BB (1) (4) (5) are higher than BB (2) (3).

  In addition, among patterns 4 to 7 that develop to production C, patterns 5 and 7 in which one of the opportunity to develop to production B and the opportunity to develop production C are triggered by a stop operation, and the other is triggered by the passage of time. BB (1) has a higher expected expectation than patterns 4 and 6.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when the stage B is developed to stage B after stage A, the winning expectation of BB is higher than when stage B is not developed, and when stage B is further developed after stage B. BB's winning expectation is higher than in the case where the production C does not develop.

  Then, after the production A, the development does not develop to the production B with a uniform opportunity, and after the production B, the development to the production C has a uniform opportunity. And after the start of the previous production, there is a pattern that develops to the next production with the passage of time T1 or time T2, as shown in FIG. 24, before the time T1 has elapsed after the start of the production A. Even if the first stop operation is performed and the production B does not develop, the production B may be developed when the time T1 has elapsed after the start of the production A. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. Even if the first stop operation is not performed and the time T1 elapses and the effect B does not develop after the start of the effect A, the possibility that the effect will develop into the effect B by the subsequent first stop operation. After starting the production B as shown in FIG. Even if the second stop operation is performed before the time T2 elapses and the effect does not develop into the effect C, the effect C may develop into the effect C when the time T2 elapses after the start of the effect B. As shown in FIG. 25, after the start of the production B, even if the time T2 has elapsed without the second stop operation being performed, the second stop operation is subsequently performed even when the production C does not develop into the production C. There is a possibility of developing into production C.

  For this reason, even if a stop operation is performed after the start of the previous production or time elapses, even if one of the conditions is not developed, the next production is further developed. It can be expected to develop, that is, to develop a production with a high expectation degree of winning of BB.

  In addition, even when performing a stop operation after the start of the previous production before the time that may develop into the production has elapsed, even when performing a stop operation after the time that may develop into the production has elapsed, Since the possibility of developing to the next production will come twice, no matter when the stop operation is performed after the start of the previous production, it will also develop into a production with a high expectation expectation of BB. Can be expected.

  In addition, after the start of the previous production, the player performs a stop operation at a timing before the time that may develop into the production has elapsed, or at a timing after the time that may have developed into the production has elapsed. By selecting whether to perform the stop operation, it is possible to select a timing for developing to the next effect.

  In addition, even in the case of patterns that develop to the same stage of production, patterns with different triggers of production development are selected with a probability that the winning expectation varies depending on the type of BB, and the stop operation Therefore, it is possible to infer the type of BB that has been won according to whether it has evolved to the next production or the next production with the passage of time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the pattern 3 that develops into the effect B when the time T1 has elapsed after the start of the effect A, the third time before the time T1 has elapsed after the start of the effect A. When a stop operation up to the stop is performed and the game is ended, the step-up effect is ended at that point, and thereafter, the effect B is not executed even when the time T1 has elapsed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the pattern 6 that develops to the effect C when the time T2 elapses after the start of the effect B is the same, and before the time T2 elapses after the start of the effect B, When a stop operation up to the third stop is performed and the game is ended, the step-up effect is ended at that point, and after that, the effect C is not executed even if the time T2 elapses.

  In this way, in the pattern that develops to the next production as time passes after the start of the production, if the game progresses and ends before the development to the next production, the production develops thereafter. Since the post-game effect is given priority, the consistency between the step-up effect and the post-game effect can be maintained.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, it is possible to control to a freeze state in which the operation of the stop switch is invalidated for a certain time after the game starts. When controlled, a step-up notice effect may be performed. In this case, the period during which the freeze state is controlled needs to be less than T1 described above.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 27, after the production A is started with the start of the game, it is possible to set a stop operation invalid period that cannot be effectively accepted even if the stop switch is operated for a certain period of time. Even if a stop operation is performed after a certain time has elapsed after the start of the production A, the production B does not develop into the production B, and when the stop operation is performed after a certain time has elapsed, the production B develops. Therefore, even if the stop operation is performed immediately after the start of the production A, the production A does not develop into the production B at the same time, and the production A is surely executed until a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, after the production A, the player can clearly recognize that the pattern develops into the production B according to the stop operation.

  In this embodiment, the step-up effect suggests the possibility of winning a BB. However, a right that is advantageous to other players, for example, a right to be notified of an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player is given. It is good also as a structure which suggests the possibility of having.

  In addition, the step-up effect is a configuration in which the effect develops according to the operation related to the progress of the game or the lapse of time, but the effect of the effect develops according to the operation not related to the progress of the game or the lapse of time. Also good.

  In this embodiment, even if the production does not develop, the final stage production for each pattern is maintained until the third stop. However, in the production A that does not further develop, After the start, when the first stop operation is performed before the time T1 elapses, until the time T1 elapses, when the time T1 elapses without the first stop operation, the effect A If the second stop operation is performed before the time T2 elapses after the start of the effect B, the second stop operation is performed until the time T2 elapses. When the time T2 has elapsed, the effect B may be maintained until the second stop time. With such a configuration, when the time elapses without performing the stop operation, before the time elapses. When stop operation is performed In any case, the production will be maintained as it is, the expectation for the next production can be maintained, and the production can be terminated in a situation where it is clear that the production will not develop reliably. It becomes possible.

  The invalid operation effect is a MAXBET operation instruction effect instructing the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control simultaneously with the start of the game, and is subsequently involved in the case where the MAXBET switch 6 is operated or in the game progress control When stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, it is an effect that can notify the possibility of winning a special role, and consists of patterns 1 to 4 as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 29, pattern 1 performs a MAXBET operation instruction effect instructing a MAXBET operation in response to a game start operation (reception of an internal winning command), and then stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. If the MAXBET switch 6 is operated before (before receiving the reel stop command) (when the operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON) is received, BB is won. As a result, the MAXBET switch 6 is not operated (without receiving an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON). When an operation is performed (when a reel stop command is received), as shown in FIG. Is a pattern that does not carry out the production. In the result notification effect, there are three types of result notifications A, B, and C with different winning expectations of special roles, and the probability that the ratio selected at the time of winning the special role is higher in the order of result notifications A, B, and C. In the case of the result notification A, the winning expectation degree of the special role is the highest, and in the case of the result notification B, the winning expectation degree of the special role is high and the result notification C is selected. The expectation of winning the special role is the lowest.

  In pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 29, a MAXBET operation instruction effect is performed in response to a game start operation (reception of an internal winning command), and then before the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated (reel stop command). When the MAXBET switch 6 is operated (when an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON) is received), the result notification effect is performed, and the MAXBET switch 6 is not operated (without receiving an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch has changed from OFF to ON), and when a stop operation is performed (when a reel stop command is received), As shown in 30 (b), this is a pattern for performing a result notification effect at the first stop. As in pattern 1, the result notification effect is composed of three types of result notifications A, B, and C with different winning expectations for special roles. When the result notification is A, the winning expectation level for special roles is the highest, Next, the winning expectation degree of the special role in the case of the result notification B is high, and the winning expectation degree of the special role is the lowest in the case of the result notification C.

  As shown in FIG. 29, pattern 3 performs a MAXBET operation instruction effect in response to a game start operation (reception of an internal winning command), and then before a stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated (reel stop command). When the MAXBET switch 6 is operated (when an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON) is received), the result notification effect is performed, and the MAXBET switch 6 is not operated (without receiving an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON), and when a stop operation is performed (when a reel stop command is received), As shown in FIG. 30 (c), it is a pattern for performing a result notification effect at the time of the second stop. As in pattern 1, the result notification effect is composed of three types of result notifications A, B, and C with different winning expectations for special roles. When the result notification is A, the winning expectation level for special roles is the highest, Next, the winning expectation degree of the special role in the case of the result notification B is high, and the winning expectation degree of the special role is the lowest in the case of the result notification C.

  As shown in FIG. 29, pattern 4 performs a MAXBET operation instruction effect in response to a game start operation (reception of an internal winning command), and then before a stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated (reel stop command). When the MAXBET switch 6 is operated (when an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON) is received), the result notification effect is performed, and the MAXBET switch 6 is not operated (without receiving an operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON), and when a stop operation is performed (when a reel stop command is received), It is a pattern which performs a result notification effect at the time of the 3rd stop. As in pattern 1, the result notification effect is composed of three types of result notifications A, B, and C with different winning expectations for special roles. When the result notification is A, the winning expectation level for special roles is the highest, Next, the winning expectation degree of the special role in the case of the result notification B is high, and the winning expectation degree of the special role is the lowest in the case of the result notification C.

  In Patterns 2 to 4, if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated before the stop operation, the result notification effect is performed at that time, so the appearance is not different from that of Pattern 1 and the MAXBET switch 6 is operated. It is possible to recognize the difference between the patterns by performing the stop operation without performing the operation.

  In the effect pattern selection process, in addition to whether or not the invalid operation effect is executed, any of the patterns 1 to 4 is further selected when the invalid operation effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 28B, when the selection rate of pattern 1 among patterns 1 to 4 is higher than the sum of the selection rates of patterns 2 to 4 and an invalid operation effect is performed, MAXBET switch 6 When the stop operation is performed without operating the result, the result notification effect is not performed in most cases, but the result notification effect is rarely performed. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the unexpectedness when the result notification effect is executed by performing the stop operation without operating the MAXBET switch 6 in spite of the execution of the MAXBET operation instruction effect.

  In addition, although the selectivity of the pattern 1 is higher than the sum of the selectivity of the patterns 2 to 4 among the patterns 1 to 4, the sum of the selectivity of the patterns 2 to 4 of the patterns 1 to 4 is In this case, when the invalid operation effect is performed, when the stop operation is performed without operating the MAXBET switch 6, In most cases, the result notification effect is performed, but the result notification effect is rarely performed. Therefore, even if a MAXBET operation instruction effect is executed, a result notification effect can be executed even if a player who does not operate the MAXBET switch 6 plays a game, and a result notification effect that is normally executed is not executed. The unexpectedness can be enhanced.

  In addition, the patterns 1 to 4 are selected with different probabilities depending on whether or not the BB is won, and the BB winning expectation varies depending on the selected pattern.

  The BB winning expectation degree is a numerical value indicating the possibility of winning a BB when an effect of a certain pattern is executed as described above.

  In this embodiment, the selection rate of the invalid operation effect pattern is determined so that the winning expectation degree of BB for each pattern becomes the expectation degree shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (b), when the stop operation is performed without operating the MAXBET switch 6, the pattern 1 in which the result notification effect is not performed has the lowest BB winning expectation, and the MAXBET switch 6 is operated. When the stop operation is performed without performing, the pattern 2 in which the result notification effect is performed at the first stop, the pattern 3 in which the result notification effect is performed in the second stop, and the pattern 4 in which the result notification effect is performed at the third stop. In order, the winning expectation degree of BB becomes higher.

  Therefore, when the MAXBET operation instruction effect is executed at the start of the game and the stop operation is performed without operating the MAXBET switch 6, the result notification effect is performed when the result notification effect is performed. If the BB winning expectation is higher than when there is no result and the result notification effect is performed, the BB winning expectation is higher when the result notification effect is performed at the second stop than at the first stop. The BB winning expectation is higher when the result notification effect is performed at the third stop than at the second stop.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as a pattern of the invalid operation effect, only when the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control is operated after the game is started and before the stop operation related to the game progress control is performed. Not only when the result notification effect is performed and when the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control is operated before the stop operation that is involved in the game progress control is performed, but the MAXBET switch 6 is not operated. Even when a stop operation is performed, there are both patterns in which a result notification effect is performed. Originally, the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control before the stop operation involved in the game progress control is operated. The result notification effect that is executed by operating is stopped without the MAXBET switch 6 being operated. Since there is also the case is performed, it can have surprising to execution timing of the result notification effect.

  Also, the BB winning expectation degree when selecting pattern 1 is different from the BB winning expectation degree when selecting patterns 2 to 4, and in patterns 2 to 4, the MAXBET switch 6 was operated before the stop operation. In this case, the result notification effect will be performed at that time, and it looks the same as pattern 1, and it is possible to recognize the difference between each pattern by performing a stop operation without operating the MAXBET switch 6. It becomes. Thus, after the MAXBET operation instruction effect is executed at the start of the game, when a stop operation related to the game progress control is performed without operating the MAXBET switch 6 not related to the game progress control, the result notification effect is displayed. It is possible to guess the possibility that the BB is won depending on whether or not it is performed, and after the MAXBET operation instruction effect is executed at the start of the game, before the stop operation related to the progress control of the game, When the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the progress control is operated, it cannot be recognized whether it is the pattern 1 or the patterns 2 to 4, and the possibility of winning the BB may be estimated. It becomes difficult. For this reason, there is a possibility that BB is won by selecting whether to perform the stop operation without operating the MAXBET switch 6 after the game starts or to operate the MAXBET switch 6 before the stop operation. It is possible for the player to play a game by selecting either a game property that is easy to guess or a game property that is difficult to guess.

  Even if any of the patterns 1 to 4 is selected, after the MAXBET operation instruction effect is executed at the start of the game, the game progress control is performed before the stop operation related to the game progress control is performed. When the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved is operated, a result notification effect is always executed. Therefore, when the MAXBET operation instruction effect is executed at the start of the game, the player reliably operates the MAXBET switch 6. Production can be performed. Further, since the result notification effect of any of result notifications A to C with different BB winning expectation degrees is executed, by operating the MAXBET switch 6 when the MAXBET operation instruction effect is performed, pattern 1 or pattern Although the winning expectation degree of BB by 2-4 cannot be recognized, the winning expectation degree of BB by the kind of result alert | report can be recognized reliably.

  In addition, when a stop operation is performed without operating the MAXBET switch 6 after the MAXBET operation instruction effect is executed at the start of the game, the expected degree of winning when selecting patterns 2 to 4 with different timings when the result notification effect is performed Therefore, the possibility that the BB is elected depends on whether the time when the result notification effect is performed is the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop. It can be guessed more clearly. That is, unlike the case where the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, when the pattern 1 is selected, the result notification effect is not performed, and the winning expectation degree of the BB cannot be reliably recognized from the type of the result notification. However, when the patterns 2 to 4 are selected and the result notification effect is performed by performing the stop operation without operating the MAXBET switch 6, in addition to the type of the result notification effect, The winning expectation can be recognized, and the possibility of winning the BB can be estimated more finely.

  In the present embodiment, the BB winning expectation is different depending on whether the result notification effect is performed in the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop. However, depending on whether the result notification effect is performed when the left reel is stopped, when the middle reel is stopped, or when the right reel is stopped, that is, which of the plurality of operation targets is operated. Depending on whether the result notification effect is performed, the winning expectation degree of BB may be different.

  In this embodiment, the invalid operation effect suggests the possibility of winning a BB. However, similar to the step-up effect, the player may be given a right that is advantageous to other players. It is good also as a structure.

  In this embodiment, in the invalid operation effect, the result notification effect is executed by operating the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control after the game is started. Any configuration may be used as long as the result notification effect is executed by an operation that is not involved, and the result notification effect may be executed by operating the operation unit for the effect that is not always involved in the progress control of the game. .

  The valid operation effect is an effect similar to the invalid operation effect, and when the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control is operated after the game starts, or the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R involved in the game progress control. Is operated, it is possible to notify the possibility of winning a special role, and consists of patterns 1 and 2 as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32, pattern 1 performs a start effect indicating the start of an effective operation effect triggered by a game start operation (reception of an internal winning command), and then at the first stop (after receiving an internal winning command). When the reel stop command is received for the first time, that is, when the stop switch involved in the game progress control is operated for the first time, the launch effect of launching the missile is performed, and at the third stop (receiving the internal winning command) After the third reel stop command is received), a result notification effect is provided to notify the possibility of winning the BB, and the game progresses before the first stop operation involved in the game progress control. When the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the control is operated (the operation detection command indicating that the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 has changed from OFF to ON is received. When), without firing effect is a pattern that performs the firing effect upon the first stop, even in this case.

  Pattern 2 gives a start effect upon the start operation of the game (reception of an internal winning command), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32, the MAXBET switch 6 is not operated (the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 is OFF). FIG. 33 also shows the case where the first stop operation is performed (without receiving the operation detection command indicating the change to ON) (when the reel stop command is received for the first time after receiving the internal winning command). As described above, when the MAXBET switch 6 not involved in the game progress control is operated before the first stop operation (after receiving the internal winning command and before receiving the reel stop command) (the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6). When the operation detection command indicating that the change from OFF to ON is received), the above-described launch effect is performed and the third stop (internal winning) After receiving the command, when receiving a reel stop command) the third is a pattern that performs result notification effect. Further, when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated before the first stop operation, the firing effect started when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated is continuously performed even during the first stop. ing.

  In Patterns 1 and 2, when the first stop operation is performed without operating the MAXBET switch 6, the firing effect is performed at the time of the first stop. The difference between the pattern 1 and the pattern 2 can be recognized by operating the MAXBET switch 6 before the first stop operation.

  In either of the patterns 1 and 2, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not particularly instructed in the start effect, but the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 may be instructed in the start effect.

  In the effect pattern selection process, in addition to whether or not the effective operation effect is executed, when the effective operation effect is executed, any one of the patterns 1 and 2 is further selected.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the selection rate of pattern 1 out of patterns 1 and 2 is higher than the selection rate of pattern 2 and an effective operation effect is performed, MAXBET before the first stop operation. Even if the switch 6 is operated, the firing effect is not performed in most cases, but the firing effect is rarely performed. For this reason, when the start effect is performed and the MAXBET switch 6 is operated before the stop operation, the unexpected effect can be further enhanced by performing the launch effect that is not normally performed.

  In addition, although the selection rate of the pattern 1 is higher than the selection rate of the pattern 2 among the patterns 1 and 2, the selection rate of the pattern 2 of the patterns 1 and 2 is higher than the selection rate of the pattern 1. In such a configuration, when an effective operation effect is performed, a firing effect is almost always performed when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated before the first stop operation. However, there are rare occasions when launching is not performed. For this reason, although the start effect is performed and the MAXBET switch 6 is operated before the stop operation, the unexpectedness can be enhanced by not executing the normally performed launch effect.

  The patterns 1 and 2 are selected with different probabilities depending on whether or not the BB is won, and the BB winning expectation varies depending on the selected pattern.

  The BB winning expectation degree is a numerical value indicating the possibility of winning a BB when an effect of a certain pattern is executed as described above.

  In the present embodiment, the selection rate of the invalid operation effect pattern is determined so that the winning expectation degree of BB for each pattern becomes the expectation degree shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the MAXBET switch 6 is operated before the first stop operation rather than the pattern 1 in which the firing effect is not performed even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated before the first stop operation. BB winning expectation is higher in the pattern 2 where the launching effect is performed.

  Therefore, after the start effect, the BB winning expectation is higher when the launch effect is performed than when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated before the first stop operation than when the launch effect is not performed. Become.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as the pattern of the effective operation effect, the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control is operated after the game is started and before the first stop operation related to the game progress control is performed. In addition to the pattern in which the firing effect is performed only in the first stop operation and the first stop operation related to the progress control of the game is performed, the game is not performed before the first stop operation is performed. Even when the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the progress control of the game is operated, there are both patterns in which the firing effect is performed, which is originally executed by performing the first stop operation involved in the progress control of the game. Since the launch effect is also executed when the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the progress control of the game is operated before the first stop operation, Execution timing morphism effect can have surprising to.

  Also, the BB winning expectation degree when selecting pattern 1 is different from the BB winning expectation degree when selecting pattern 2, and in patterns 1 and 2, the first stop operation is performed without operating the MAXBET switch 6. In either case, the firing effect is performed at the time of the first stop, and both the pattern 1 and the pattern 2 are not changed in appearance, and the pattern 1 is operated by operating the MAXBET switch 6 before the first stop operation. And the difference between the patterns 2 can be recognized. Thereby, when the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the progress control of the game is operated after the game is started and before the first stop operation, the possibility that the BB is won is estimated according to the frequency at which the firing effect is performed. On the other hand, when the first stop operation related to the progress control of the game is performed without operating the MAXBET switch 6 that is not related to the progress control of the game, whether the pattern 1 or the pattern 2 is determined. It cannot be recognized, and it is difficult to guess the possibility of winning the BB. For this reason, there is a possibility that BB is won by selecting whether to perform the stop operation without operating the MAXBET switch 6 after the game starts or to operate the MAXBET switch 6 before the stop operation. It is possible for the player to play a game by selecting either a game property that is easy to guess or a game property that is difficult to guess.

  In addition, when the pattern 2 is selected, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated before the first stop operation after the start of the game, and the launch effect starts. Thereafter, the MAXBET switch 6 is also used during the first stop. The launch effect that is started when is operated is continuously performed, and at the time of the first stop, the launch effect is not newly performed or the effect does not advance first. For this reason, even if the launch effect is performed when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated or the launch effect is performed at the time of the first stop, it is possible to share the effect after the launch effect. In addition to reducing the data capacity, even if the launch effect is triggered by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 or the launch effect is triggered by the first stop operation, the effect that follows the launch effect is the same pattern. Since it will proceed, the effective operation effect will be easy to understand.

  In this embodiment, the effective operation effect suggests the possibility of winning a BB. However, similar to the step-up effect and the invalid operation effect, rights that are advantageous to other players may be granted. It is good also as a structure which suggests sex.

  In this embodiment, in the effective operation effect, after the game is started, the launch effect is executed by operating the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progression control. It is only necessary to have a configuration in which a firing effect is executed by performing an operation that is not performed, and a configuration in which a firing effect is executed by operating an operation unit for rendering that is not always involved in the progress control of the game may be employed.

  Next, the special role winning suggestion 1 (hereinafter referred to as a continuous operation effect) will be described.

  The continuous operation effect is executed when a corresponding effect pattern is selected in an effect pattern selection process executed when an internal winning command associated with the start of the game is received.

  In the effect pattern selection process, when the fact that the special role is won is specified from the internal winning command, the effect pattern of the continuous operation effect is higher than when the fact that the special role is not won is specified. Therefore, the expectation for winning the special role can be enhanced only by executing the continuous operation effect.

  In the continuous operation effect, first, an instruction effect instructing that the MAXBET switch 6 is operated 10 times within 5 seconds simultaneously with the start of the game is started. If the MAXBET switch 6 is not operated until the game ends (until all reels stop) after the instruction effect starts, the instruction effect ends at the end of the game. In this case, whether or not the special role is won is not notified following the instruction production.

  Thereafter, when a new game is started (when an internal winning command is received), if the special game has been won by the previous game, the special game will be announced. The notice of winning the special role will continue until these special roles are won (the same is true for announcements made under other conditions as shown below).

  If the special role is not won by the previous game, the notification related to the instruction production in the previous game is not performed when a new game is started. However, if the special role is won in the newly started game, the instruction effect for the new continuous operation effect can be started again.

  On the other hand, when the MAXBET switch 6 is first operated by the player before the game is over, the timer for the time limit timer assigned to the RAM 91c is started. The MAXBET switch 6 is not operated up to 10 times (including the operation when the time measurement is started) and all reels are stopped until the time measured by the timer for time limit reaches 5 seconds. In this case, the instruction effect ends at the end of the game, as in the case where the MAXBET switch 6 is not operated at all.

  In this case as well, the presence / absence of the special role will not be announced following the instruction production, and if the special role has been won by the previous game when the new game is started, The winning of the role is announced. If the special role is not won by the previous game, the notification related to the instruction production in the previous game is not performed when a new game is started.

  Further, although all the reels did not stop before the time measured by the timer started by the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6 became 5 seconds, the time measured by the time limit timer becomes 5 seconds. If the MAXBET switch 6 has not been operated up to 10 times before, the instruction effect ends when the time counted by the time limit timer reaches 5 seconds. In this case, regardless of whether or not the special role is won, following the instruction production, it is notified that none of the special roles has been won (losing). This notice of losing ends when the game ends because all reels have stopped.

  Thereafter, if a special role is won by the previous game when a new game is started, the special role is announced. If the special role is not won by the previous game, the notification related to the instruction production in the previous game is not performed when a new game is started.

  If the MAXBET switch 6 is operated 10 times without stopping all the reels until the time measured by the timer started by the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6 reaches 5 seconds, the MAXBET switch 6 When the number of operations reaches 10 times, the instruction effect ends. In this case, if the special role is won, the special effect will be announced following the instruction effect, and if neither is selected, the loss will be notified following the instruction effect.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a continuous operation effect suggesting the possibility of winning a special role is started at the same time as the game starts. This continuous operation effect is to notify whether or not a special role is won after the instruction effect.

  The player can intervene by operating the MAXBET switch 6 while the instruction effect is being performed while notifying whether or not the special role is won in the continuous operation effect. Yes. When the player intervenes by operating the MAXBET switch 6 for this continuous operation effect (instruction effect) and operates the MAXBET switch 6 10 times within 5 seconds from the first operation, the instruction effect is displayed. At the same time, the player will be notified of the special role.

  Here, the starting point for counting whether or not the MAXBET switch 6 has been operated 10 times that the player will be notified of whether or not the special role is won following the instruction effect is first determined by the MAXBET switch 6. It is from when it was operated. Since the player can intervene in the continuous operation effect at a free timing after the start of the continuous operation effect (instruction effect), that is, a highly flexible intervention operation, it is easy for the player to intervene in the continuous operation effect As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the player operates the MAXBET switch 6 for the first time and displays an intention to intervene in the continuous operation effect, the player is notified as to whether or not the special role has been won following the instruction effect. In this case, the MAXBET switch 6 must be repeatedly operated 10 times within 5 seconds (9 times excluding the first operation). Thus, even after the player starts the intervention of the continuous operation effect, it is necessary to continue the intervention operation. Therefore, the sense of intervention in the effect is enhanced, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, when a continuous operation effect is performed, the presence / absence of a special role is announced following the instruction effect in the game, a total of 10 MAXBETs within 5 seconds from the first MAXBET switch 6 operation. The condition is that the switch 6 has been operated. However, if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated for the 10th time, the presence / absence of a special role is announced without waiting for the elapse of 5 seconds from the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6.

  As a result, the establishment timing of the condition for the special role winning to be executed following the instruction production is linked to the notification timing of whether or not the special role has been won, so the presence or absence of the special role has been announced. Sometimes this is easy for the player to understand. Moreover, since the presence or absence of the special role is announced at the timing linked with the player's operation (the 10th operation of the MAXBET switch 6), the player's sense of intervention for the continuous operation effect is further enhanced. Can further enhance the interest of the game.

  Even when a continuous operation effect is performed, unless the player operates the MAXBET switch 6, in any case, the presence / absence of a special role will be announced following the instruction effect in the game. There is no. Since a general player wants to know as soon as possible whether or not a special role has been won, it can prompt the player to intervene in the continuous operation effect by operating the MAXBET switch 6. It will be a thing.

  On the other hand, when the special role is won and the continuous operation effect is performed, the player does not operate the MAXBET switch 6 at all, or the game ends before the MAXBET switch 6 is operated 10 times, or the first operation Even if the MAXBET switch 6 cannot be operated 10 times within 5 seconds from the start of the game, the player will be notified of the special role when the next game is started.

  For this reason, information that the player wants to know (ie, that the user did not operate the MAXBET switch 6 while the instruction effect of the continuous operation effect was performed, or that an appropriate operation could not be performed even if operated) The information on whether or not the special role has been won) cannot be known by the player at any time, and the disadvantage of the player is not increased too much.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2L is stopped when the player performs a stop operation. However, if the player does not perform the stop operation, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2L continue to rotate indefinitely. However, even if the instruction effect is started simultaneously with the start of the game, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to win the special role unless the player operates the MAXBET switch 6. For this reason, it is not necessary to increase the control load when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2L are left in a rotating state.

  Further, when the instruction effect is being executed, it may be considered that all or a part of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is left rotating while the MAXBET switch 6 is operated. However, it is only necessary to determine whether or not to win a special role or notify of a loss after the instruction effect during the game for only 5 seconds after the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6. For this reason, the control load does not become too large.

  In this embodiment, when a continuous operation effect is performed, if the MAXBET switch 6 has not been operated a total of 10 times within 5 seconds after the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6, a notice of losing will be made at the end of the instruction effect. However, in such a case, it is also possible to end only the instruction effect without notifying anything. If the special combination is won, the special combination may be announced when a BET operation is performed in the next game or when a start operation is performed.

  In addition, in the case where a continuous operation effect is performed, a special operation is continued after the instruction effect during the game on condition that the MAXBET switch 6 is operated 10 times in total within 5 seconds from the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6. Whether or not the winning combination has been announced to the player, either one or both of the time condition of 5 seconds and the operation condition of 10 times, for example, a continuous operation effect is executed. It may be variable by lottery performed every time.

  For example, one may be selected from the conditions of 2 seconds 4 times and 3 seconds 6 times, or may be selected from the conditions of 3 seconds 3 times and 3 seconds 6 times. In these cases, there will be a change in the timing at which the presence or absence of the special role will be announced following the instruction production, or there will be a change in the difficulty level of the operation required for that, so there will be a change to the continuous operation production. This will further increase the interest of the intervention.

  In addition, the continuous operation effect is started from the start of the game, but may be started under other conditions and timing. For example, the continuous operation effect may be started from the timing when all the reels are stopped.

  As described above, in the continuous operation effect that is started after the game is finished, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not involved in the progress control of the game when the instruction effect is being executed. , 8C, 8R can be applied instead of the MAXBET switch 6.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the instruction effect is being executed, the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control is limited as an operation that becomes an intention display for starting the intervention to the continuous operation effect. Time measurement by the time posting timer is started, and the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is an operation to intervene in the continuous operation effect after displaying the intention of intervention.

  On the other hand, the operation that becomes the intention display of the intervention for starting the time counting by the time limit posting timer may be an operation related to the progress control of the game. For example, the operation of the stop switch (first stop operation) during rotation of all reels is related to the progress control of the game, but it can also be applied as an operation for indicating the intention of intervention to start timing by the timer for posting the time limit. .

  In the present embodiment, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated 10 times within 5 seconds including the first operation. In the game in which the continuous operation effect is performed following the instruction effect, the special role is won. The condition of whether to notify the presence / absence of the presence / absence has been described. However, the condition of the operation of whether to announce the presence / absence of the special role following the instruction production is not limited to this. For example, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated for a predetermined time ( It may be operated continuously (intermittently) for 3 seconds or less. Alternatively, the second and subsequent operations of the MAXBET switch 6 performed after 3 seconds have elapsed since the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6 may be continued for a predetermined time.

  Alternatively, in the case where an operation intervening in the continuous operation effect after the intention display for starting the intervention in the continuous operation effect (the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6) is an operation of a plurality of operation means, the plurality of operation means are It may be operated in a predetermined pattern. For example, after a display of intention to start intervention for a continuous operation effect, two operation units, one BET button 14 and a MAXBET switch 6, are applied as operation means for intervening in the continuous operation effect, and these are alternately performed 20 times (each It is also possible to notify the presence / absence of a special role following the instruction effect when the button is operated within 5 seconds from the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6 only 10 times.

  In the present embodiment, both the operation that becomes the intention display for starting intervention to the continuous operation effect and the operation that intervenes in the continuous operation effect after the intention display are both operations of the MAXBET switch 6, This operation may be an operation of different operation means. For example, the operation of the single BET button 14 is started as an operation that becomes an intention display to start intervention in the continuous operation effect, but the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is an operation to intervene in the continuous operation effect after the intention display. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the MAXBET switch 6 has been operated a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time from the start of timing.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a special action is won and a continuous operation effect is performed, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, but 10 operations cannot be performed within 5 seconds, and a losing notice is made following the instruction effect. If the MAXBET switch 6 is not operated, or if the game ends and only the instruction effect is ended before the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has elapsed for 5 seconds or 10 times, At the start of the game (that is, at the start operation time), the winning of the special role was announced, but the timing of the special role winning notification in such a case is not limited to this, For example, when the next game ends (when the third stop button is operated), it may be the first stop or the second stop. Furthermore, it may be when a betting number setting operation for starting the next game is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, whether or not the special role is won is notified by the continuous operation effect, but any effect that informs the player of advantageous information by the player's intervention operation may be used. For example, as a notification of whether or not a notification state in which an operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified by the player's intervention operation is won, or information for inferring a set value by the player's intervention operation is notified. Also good.

  Next, various control contents executed by the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the main CPU 41a performs the startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal that is output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the main CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the main CPU 41a malfunctions. This process is performed at startup.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and if the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal has not been input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), and the states of the stop switch 36a and the automatic settlement switch 36b are acquired. Validity / invalidity of the stop function and automatic settlement function is set in a specific register of the main CPU 41a (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa9), and after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except for the used stack area (Sa10), the door When commanding the transmission of the door command stored in the command transmission buffer, the door command transmission request 2 set in the RAM 41c is cleared and the transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is requested. The door command transmission request 1 is set (Sa11), the interrupt is permitted (Sa12), and the error handling shown in FIG. To migrate to.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa13). If power interruption interrupt processing (main) is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa13 (data for destruction diagnosis is power interruption) Since the data in the RAM 41c is not normal even in cases other than 5A (H) stored sometimes, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa9), and the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c After executing the initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas except for (Sa10), the door command transmission request 2 set in the RAM 41c is cleared and the door command transmission request 1 is set in the RAM 41c (Sa11). The interruption is permitted (Sa12), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. When interrupt is permitted in step Sa12, the timer interrupt process (main) is periodically executed. Accordingly, the door command is based on the door command transmission request 1 set in step Sa11. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 35, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). Then, an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is set in the special command transmission buffer (Sb3). The error command set in Sb3 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  Next, the error code stored in the register is checked to determine whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error or an abnormal winning error (Sb4), and a RAM abnormal error or an abnormal winning error is indicated. If it is an error code, the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb4 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM error or an abnormal winning error, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sb5). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb6). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sb5. Return. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb6, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb7 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is restored to the display state saved in the stack in the step Sb1 (Sb8), and an error command indicating that the error state is released is set in the special command transmission buffer ( Sb9), the process returns to the original process. The error command set in Sb9 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormal error and the abnormal winning error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated, so that the error processing is canceled. However, in the case of error processing due to a RAM error or an abnormal winning error, even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated, the error state is canceled and the original state is not restored.

  Returning to FIG. 34, if it is determined in step Sa13 that the data for destructive diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa14), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa15), and the value of the door monitoring timer for measuring the detection interval of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 and the transmission delay time of the command are counted. The delay counter value and the history of the detection signal input state from the door opening detection switch 25 are cleared (Sa16), the door command transmission request 2 is cleared, and the door command transmission request 1 is set (Sa17). Next, a return command indicating that the state before power interruption is restored is set in the special command transmission buffer (Sa18), and the process proceeds to step Sa19.

  In step Sa19, each register is restored to the state before power interruption, that is, stored in the stack, interrupt is permitted (Sa20), and the process executed last before power interruption is returned to. Further, when the interrupt is permitted in the step of Sa20, the timer interrupt process (main) is periodically executed, and the return command set in the step of Sa18 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a accordingly. Thereafter, a door command is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a based on the door command transmission request 1 set in step Sa17.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 that initializes all the storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa21), Proceed to step Sa22.

  In step Sa22, the door command transmission request 2 is cleared, the door command transmission request 1 is set, a setting start command is set in the special command transmission buffer (Sa23), and interrupts are permitted (Sa24). ), And shifts to the setting change process shown in FIG. When the interrupt is permitted in the step Sa24, the timer interrupt process (main) is periodically executed, and accordingly, the setting start command set in the step Sa23 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a. Thereafter, the door command is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a based on the door command transmission request 1 set in step Sa22.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the control content of the setting change process executed by the main CPU 41a.

  In the setting change process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c is read out, and the read value is set as the display value (Sc1). Whether the display value is outside the settable range (1 to 6) or not. (Sc2), if the display value is within the settable range, the process proceeds to step Sc4. If the display value is outside the settable range, the display value is corrected to 1, and the process proceeds to step Sc5.

  In the step of Sc5, after the display value is displayed on the set value display 24, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc5, Sc6). In the step of Sc5, the reset / setting switch When on of 38 is detected, the switch-on flag is cleared (Sc9), 1 is added to the display value (Sc10), and the process returns to the step of Sc2.

  When the start switch 7 is detected to be on in the step of Sc6, the switch-on flag is cleared (Sc11), the value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated to 0 (Sc12), and the set key switch It waits until 37 becomes an OFF state (Sc13).

  If it is determined in step S13 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the display value is stored in the setting value work (Sc14), a game state command is generated and set in the command transmission buffer (Sc15), and the game process is performed. Migrate to The gaming state command set in the step of Sc15 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the subsequent timer interruption process (main).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the main CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed. In the reel rotation process, a freeze lottery for determining whether or not to control the freeze state is also executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed. In the game end process, RT transition processing and the like are also executed. At the end of the game end process, the door command transmission request 1 is set in the RAM 41c to request transmission of the door command.

  38 to 40 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET process executed by the main CPU 41a in step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and a prescribed number (3 regardless of the gaming state in this embodiment) is set in the RAM 41c. Then, based on whether or not the replay game flag indicating that it is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, a BET command indicating that 3 bets have been added is set in the normal command transmission buffer (Se4), and the value of the BET counter is set to 1. Add (Se5), refer to the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c, determine whether the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se6), and if the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number, Returning to the step, if the value of the BET counter is a specified number, a insertion impossible flag indicating that a medal cannot be inserted is set in the RAM 41c (Se7), and the process proceeds to the step of Se11. The BET command set in step Se4 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the full state of the overflow tank 35 has been determined before the previous game. If the full tank flag is set, an error code indicating a full tank error is set in the register (Se9), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  If the full flag is not set in the Se8 step, the setting before waiting for input is performed (Se10), and the process proceeds to the Se11 step. In the setting before waiting for insertion, the insertion disable flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared and the detection of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is enabled, that is, involved in the progress control of the game. In addition, when the insertion of a medal is detected, a first insertion flag indicating that the medal is the first inserted medal after the end of the previous game control is set in the RAM 41c.

  In the step of Se11, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. When it is determined in step Se11 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. (Se12), the process proceeds to step Se14, and if it is determined that the medal cannot be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se13), and the process proceeds to the step Se14.

  In the step of Se14, is a switch-on flag indicating that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 that are involved in the game progress control in the BET process is set to ON? If any of these switch-on flags is set, the process proceeds to step Se19. If none of these switch-on flags is set, the process proceeds to step Se15.

  In step Se15, it is determined whether or not the normal command transmission buffer is empty. If the normal command transmission buffer is not empty, the process proceeds to step Se19. If the normal command transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to Se16. Proceed to step.

  In the step of Se16, it is determined whether or not the detection state of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R not involved in the game progress control has changed, that is, whether the rising edge or the falling edge is set, and the stop switch If there is no change in the detection state of 8L, 8C, 8R, the process proceeds to step Se19, and if there is a change in the detection state of stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, an operation that can identify the change in the detection state of the corresponding stop switch The detection command is set in the normal command transmission buffer (Se17), the edge data indicating the change in the detection state of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is cleared (Se18), and the process proceeds to Se19. The operation detection command set in step Se17 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  In step Se19, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal, that is, whether or not there is a inserted medal flag indicating that the inserted medal has been detected. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se19, the process proceeds to the step of Se33, and if the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the inserted medal flag is cleared (Se20), and the non-insertable flag is set in the RAM 41c. Whether or not a medal can be inserted is determined based on whether or not a medal can be inserted (Se21). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se33.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se21, it is determined whether or not it is the first insertion after the end of the game control based on whether or not the first insertion flag is set (Se22). If it is not the first input after the end, the process proceeds to step Se26. If the first input is after the game control, the first input flag is cleared (Se23), and it is determined whether or not the full sensor 35a is detected. (Se24). If the full sensor 35a is not detected in the step of Se24, the process proceeds to the step of Se26. If the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank flag indicating the full state of the overflow tank 35 is set in the RAM 41c (Se25). , Go to the step of Se26.

  In step Se26, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the bet number is incremented by one. The BET command indicating that it has been set is set in the normal command transmission buffer (Se27), the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se28), and the process returns to the Se11 step. The BET command set in step Se27 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in the step of Se26, a credit command indicating the current credit counter value is set in the normal command transmission buffer (Se29), and the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c is set. The value is incremented by 1 (Se30), and it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value (Se31). If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se11, If the value is 50, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se32), and the process returns to the Se11 step. Return to the step of Se29. The credit command set in step Se29 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  In step Se <b> 33, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, whether or not a switch-on flag indicating detection of the operation of the start switch 7 is set. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se33, the process proceeds to the step of Se38. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the switch-on flag is cleared (Se34), and the number of bets set in the RAM 41c. Referring to the prescribed number, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se35).

  If the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number in the step of Se35, the process returns to the step of Se11. If the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off. The state is set, the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, new medal insertion is prohibited (Se36), and the setting at the start of the game is performed (Se37). Then, after the step of Se37, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step Se38, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, that is, whether or not a switch-on flag indicating that an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected is set. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se38, the process proceeds to the step of Se45, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the switch-on flag is cleared (Se39) and the RAM 41c is stored. With reference to the set number of bets, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se40). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se40, the process returns to the step of Se11. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se41). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se11 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se41, a BET command indicating that 1 is added to the bet number is set in the normal command transmission buffer (Se42), and 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se43). , 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se44), and the process returns to the Se11 step. The BET command set in step Se42 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  In the step of Se45, it is determined whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, that is, whether or not the switch-on flag indicating that the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected is set. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se45, the process proceeds to the step of Se53. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the switch-on flag is cleared (Se46), and the bet set in the RAM 41c is cleared. With reference to the prescribed number, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se47). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se47, the process proceeds to the step of Se51, and if the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se48), If the value of the credit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step Se51. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se48, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se49), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se50), and the process returns to the step of Se47. In the step of Se51, it is determined whether or not the BET counter is added. If the BET counter is not added, the process returns to the step of Se11, and if the BET counter is added, the number of bets is added by the added number. The BET command indicating that it has been set is set in the normal command transmission buffer (Se52), and the process returns to the Se11 step. The BET command set in step Se52 is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  In step Se53, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, that is, whether or not a switch-on flag indicating that an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected is set. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se53, the process returns to the step of Se11. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the switch-on flag is cleared (Se54), and the replay game flag is stored in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game based on whether or not the game is set (Se55). If the game is a replay game, the process returns to Se11. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se54, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se56). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se58, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 41c (Se57), and the process proceeds to Se58. In step Se58, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out medals corresponding to the value stored in the credit counter or BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of bets. Checkout process is performed to control the return. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se58, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se59), and the process returns to the step of Se11.

  41 and 42 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the main CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, a freeze lottery for determining whether or not to control the freeze state is executed (Si1). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a wait time (in the present embodiment, approximately 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Si2). If the wait time has not elapsed, the wait time is Wait until it has passed.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the Si2 step, a new wait time is set (Si3).

  Next, the reel motor is set to start rotating, and the reel starts rotating (Si4). Then, a sliding frame number setting process for setting the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table for each rotating reel is performed (Si5), and a setting at the time of completion of stop preparation is performed (Si6). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes valid when the constant speed rotation of the reel is detected in the origin interruption process of the timer interrupt process (main). .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the freeze condition is satisfied, that is, it is determined that the freeze state is controlled by freeze lottery, and the time when the freeze state is controlled (when all reels are rotating, during the first stop, during the second stop) (Si7). If the freeze condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Si9. If the freeze condition is satisfied, the process is assigned to the RAM 41c to measure the time of the freeze state. The specified value is set in the freeze timer counter (Si8), and the process proceeds to step Si9. The value of the freeze timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed four times.

  In the step of Si9, it is determined whether or not a switch-on flag indicating that an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R involved in the game progress control in the reel rotation process is detected is set. If the switch-on flag is set, the process proceeds to step Si14. If no switch-on flag is set, it is determined whether the normal command transmission buffer is empty (Si10).

  In step Si10, if the normal command transmission buffer is not empty, the process proceeds to step Se14. If the normal command transmission buffer is empty, whether the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 that is not involved in the game progress control is detected. Whether or not a rising edge or a falling edge indicating a change in the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 is set (Si11). If there is no change in the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6, the step of Si14 is performed. If there is a change in the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6, an operation detection command capable of specifying the change in the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 is set in the normal command transmission buffer (Si12), and the change in the detection state of the MAXBET switch 6 Is cleared (Si13), Si1 Proceed to the step.

  In step S14, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze timer counter is 0, that is, whether or not the freeze timer is controlled. When the value of the freeze timer counter is not 0 in the step of Si14, that is, when it is controlled to the freeze state, the switch-on flag indicating that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R has been detected is cleared ( Return to the step of Si15), Si9.

  When the value of the freeze timer counter is 0 in the step of Si14, that is, when it is not controlled to the freeze state (when it is not controlled to the freeze state from the beginning or when the freeze state is ended), either stop It is determined whether or not a switch operation has been detected, that is, whether or not a switch-on flag indicating that any stop switch operation has been detected is set (Si16), and any stop switch operation is also detected. If not, it is determined whether or not a reel rotation error has occurred (error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R for a certain period of time) (Si17), and the reel rotation error If no error has occurred, the insertion error (medal insertion is permitted) It is determined whether a medal payout has been detected outside of the period, and whether a payout error (medal payout is permitted outside the period during which medal payout is permitted) has occurred. Error) (Si18, Si19). If any error is not determined in steps Si17 to Si19, the process returns to step Si9.

  Further, when it is determined that an insertion error has occurred in the step of Si18, or when a payout error is determined in the step of Si19, an error code indicating the input / discharge error during reel rotation is set in the register (Si20). ), And shifts to the error processing shown in FIG. 35 (Si21). When the error is released, the process returns to the Si9 step again.

  If it is determined in step Si17 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Si22), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 35 (Si23). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si4 step again and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in step Si16, the switch-on flag is cleared (Si24), and the reel reference at that time in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch in which the operation is detected. After obtaining the number of steps from the position (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) and setting it to the work corresponding to the stop reel (Si25), it waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Si26).

  When the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation stops, it is determined whether or not all the reels have stopped (Si27). If all the reels have not stopped, the process returns to the Si5 step, and all the reels are If it has stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main CPU 41a by interrupting the start process or the game process at the interval of 0.56 ms in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3. is there.

  In the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Sk1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited. Then, after saving the register in use to the stack area (Sk2), port input processing for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port is performed (Sk3).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sk4). In the step of Sk4, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sk5). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sk9 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sk25 described later is executed (Sk6).

  Next, referring to the branch counter value, it is determined whether or not it is 1, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sk7). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, reel motor Reel starting process (Sk8) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step process (Sk9) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, motor phase signal standby processing (Sk10) for changing the phase signal to single-phase excitation after a lapse of a certain time is sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area at Sk2 is restored (Sk22). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Sk23), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sk7, LED dynamic display processing (Sk11) for dynamically lighting various indicators, and output processing of control signals and the like for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port (Sk12), random number update process for updating various software random numbers (Sk13), time counter update process for updating various time counters (Sk14), monitoring of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, door command transmission request, transmission command The door monitoring process (Sk15) for performing the above, the command transmission process (Sk16) for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer to the sub CPU 91a, the external output for updating the external output signal After sequentially executing the signal update process (Sk17), go to Sk2. There was restored registers saved in the stack area (SK22), allow interruption prohibited at step Sk1 (SK23), return to the process before the interrupt process.

  If it is timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 in the step of Sk5, it is further determined by referring to the counter value for branching whether it is 3, that is, timer interrupt 4 (Sk18). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, if it is timer interrupt 3, the passing of the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (pass of the reel reference position) is checked, and the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected and stopped. Check if the preparation is complete (whether the stop preparation completion code is set). If the stop preparation is complete and the motor is rotating at a constant speed, operate the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel. The origin passing process to be activated (Sk19), the switch input determination process 1 (Sk20) for determining whether or not the operation of the switches has been detected, whether or not the detection state of the switches has changed After the switch input determination process 2 (Sk21) for determination is sequentially executed, the registers saved in the stack area in Sk2 are restored (Sk22), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sk1 step are permitted (Sk23). Return to the process.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sk18, when the stop operation position is stored in the work of the stop reel in accordance with detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or automatic stop control, the work of the stop reel The stop switch process (Sk24) that calculates the stop position after determining the stop position from the stop operation position stored in, and counts the number of steps until the stop calculated by the stop switch process. When it is time to stop, a stop process (Sk25) for starting braking by two-phase excitation and a final stop process (Sk26) for three-phase excitation after a certain period of time after starting the brake in the stop process are sequentially executed, and then in Sk2. The register saved in the stack area is restored (Sk22), and the interrupts prohibited in the step of Sk1 are permitted ( k23), returns to the interrupt before processing.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the switch input determination process 1 executed in the timer interrupt 3 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above by the main CPU 41a.

  In the switch input determination process 1, the current confirmed data and the previous confirmed data are acquired (Sk101). The fixed data is data indicating the detection state of each switch that is updated when the detection state of each switch acquired from the input port is continuously the same. Then, it is determined whether or not any of the switches in the current confirmed data is in an ON state (Sk103). If any of the switches is not in an ON state, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If any switch is in the ON state in the step of Sk103, it is determined whether or not two or more switches are in the ON state (Sk104). If two or more switches are in the ON state, FIG. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  If two or more switches are not in the ON state in the step of Sk104, it is determined whether or not the previous fixed data of the ON switch is also ON (Sk105), and if the previous fixed data is also ON. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the final confirmed data is not ON in the step of Sk105, a switch-on flag indicating that an operation of the switch changed from OFF to ON is detected (Sk106), and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the switch input determination process 2 executed in the timer interrupt 3 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above by the main CPU 41a.

  In the switch input determination process 2, the input data of each switch acquired in the port input process is updated (Sk111), and whether or not the detection state indicated by the previous input data and the detection state indicated by the current input data are the same. If the detection state indicated by the previous input data and the detection state indicated by the current input data are not the same, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the detection state indicated by the previous input data is the same as the detection state indicated by the current input data in the step of Sk112, the determined data of the corresponding switch is updated (Sk113), and the process proceeds to the step of Sk114. In step Sk113, the current confirmed data is moved to the previous confirmed data, and the detection state indicated by the input data determined to be the same as the previous time is set as the current confirmed data.

  In the step of Sk114, it is determined whether or not the previous confirmed data after the update and the current confirmed data are the same. If the previous confirmed data and the current confirmed data are the same, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. .

  If the previous confirmed data and the current confirmed data are not the same in the step of Sk114, it is determined whether the corresponding switch has changed from OFF to ON (Sk115). If the switch has changed from OFF to ON, A rising edge indicating the change from OFF to ON is set (S116), and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the case of changing from ON to OFF in the step of Sk115, a falling edge indicating that the change has been made from ON to OFF is set (Sk117), and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the door monitoring process executed in the timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above by the main CPU 41a.

  In the door monitoring process, first, a history of the input state of the door opening detection switch 25 (a value obtained by continuing to logically OR the determination state of the positive detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the port input process for about 100 ms). The door sensor history is updated (Sk201). That is, a logical sum of the positive detection signal detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 and the door sensor history is taken as a new door sensor history.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the door monitoring timer value is 0, that is, whether or not about 100 ms has elapsed since the previous monitoring (Sk202). If the door monitoring timer value is not 0, the door monitoring timer value is set. 1 is subtracted (Sk203), the door monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the door monitoring timer is 0 in the step of Sk202, the door command is transmitted to prioritize whether the door command transmission request 2 is set, that is, the transmission of the return command or the setting start command at the time of activation. It is determined whether or not it is in a waiting state (Sk204). If the door command transmission request 2 is set, the door monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. In step S204, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 2 is set. When the door command transmission request 2 is set, the door monitoring process is terminated, whereby the value of the door command transmission buffer is set. It is not updated, and the value of the door command transmission buffer, that is, the door command indicating the detection state of the first door opening detection switch 25 after activation is not overwritten while waiting for transmission by the return command or setting start command. It is like that.

  If the door command transmission request 2 is not set in the step of Sk204, 44 is set as the value of the door monitoring timer (Sk205), and a new time measurement of 100 ms is started. After the door sensor history is acquired in the register and the door sensor history in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk206), the door open detection switch 25 indicated by the door sensor history acquired in the register and the door stored in the door command transmission buffer are stored. The detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the command is compared, and it is determined whether or not there is a change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (Sk207).

  If there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 in the step of Sk207, it is requested whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set, that is, transmission of the door command is requested when the main CPU 41a is activated or the game is ended. If the door command transmission request 1 has not been set, the door monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  When there is a change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 in the step of Sk207, or when the door command transmission request 1 is set in the step of Sk208, the door command transmission request is cleared and the door command transmission request 2 is set (Sk209), and the door command based on the door sensor history (detected state of the door open detection switch 25 after the change) acquired in the register is stored in the door command transmission buffer (Sk210), so that the door after the change After commanding the command transmission, the door monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the control content of the command transmission process executed by the main CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the command transmission process, first, it is determined whether or not the transmission delay of the error command, return command or setting start command is in progress (Sk301). If the transmission of the error command, return command or setting start command is not delayed, it is determined whether an untransmitted error command, return command or setting start command is stored in the special command transmission buffer (Sk302). ).

  If an unsent error command, return command, or setting start command is stored in the special command transmission buffer in step Sk302, the process proceeds to step Sk307, where an unsent error command, return command, or setting start command is received. If it is not stored in the special command transmission buffer, it is determined whether or not transmission of a command other than the door command, error command, return command or setting start command (hereinafter referred to as a normal command) is being delayed (Sk303). .

  If the transmission of the normal command is delayed in the step of Sk303, the process proceeds to the step of Sk308. If the transmission of the normal command is not delayed, it is determined whether or not the transmission of the door command is delayed (Sk304). If it is delayed, the process proceeds to step Sk308. If the door command transmission is not delayed, it is determined whether the door command transmission request 2 is set, that is, whether door command transmission is instructed (Sk305). .

  If the door command transmission request 2 is not set in the step of Sk305, it is determined whether or not an untransmitted normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer (Sk306), and the untransmitted normal command is a normal command. If it is stored in the transmission buffer, the process proceeds to step Sk307. If an untransmitted normal command is not stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the command transmission process is terminated, and the flowchart shown in FIG. Return to.

  In step Sk307, a command delay random value (0 to 17) is acquired, stored in the delay counter, and the process proceeds to step Sk308.

  In step Sk308, after 1 is subtracted from the delay counter value, the process proceeds to step Sk309, where it is determined whether the delay counter value is 0. If the delay counter value is not 0, the command transmission process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the delay counter value is 0 in the step of Sk309, it is determined whether or not the door command is transmitted (S310). If the door command is transmitted, the door command transmission request 2 is cleared and the door command is transmitted. The trust buffer address is set (Sk311), and the process proceeds to the step of Sk315. After the door command transmission request 2 is set, the door command transmission request 2 is not cleared until it is set in the door monitoring process and immediately before the door command associated with the setting of the door command transmission request 2 is transmitted. While waiting for door command transmission by the return command or setting start command, the value of the door command transmission buffer, that is, the door command indicating the detection state of the first door opening detection switch 25 after activation is not overwritten. .

  If it is not at the time of transmitting the door command in the step of Sk310, it is determined whether it is at the time of transmitting an error command, a return command or a setting start command (Sk312). The address of the special command transmission buffer is set (Sk313), and the process proceeds to Step Sk315.

  If the error command, the return command or the setting start command is not transmitted in the step of Sk312, that is, if the normal command is transmitted, the address indicated by the transmission pointer of the normal command transmission buffer is set (Sk314). Proceed to step.

  In step Sk315, the command stored in the address set in steps Sk311, Sk313, and Sk314 is read, transmitted to the sub CPU 91a, the command transmission process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. .

  FIG. 49 shows a power interruption interrupt process (main interrupt) that is executed when the main CPU 41a interrupts the start process or the game process when the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is input in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 2. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of ().

  In the power interruption interruption process (main), first, interruption is prohibited (Sm1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing (main). Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sm2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sm3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not inputted, the register saved in the stack area in Sm2 is restored (Sm4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sm1 is permitted (Sm5), and the process before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sm3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sm6), and all output ports are initialized (Sm7). . Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sm8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sm9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sm10, where Sm10 is the same process as Sm3), a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the operation of the main CPU 41a is surely stopped when power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, a timer interrupt process (sub) that the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 periodically executes at intervals of 1.12 ms is described below based on the flowcharts of FIGS. Explained.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the timer interrupt process (sub), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the reception buffer, that is, whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 41 ( Ss1). If the command is not stored in the reception buffer, the process proceeds to step Ss6. If the command is stored in the reception buffer, the command is acquired from the reception buffer (Ss2), and the process proceeds to step Ss3.

  In the step of Ss3, the operation detection process 1 for updating the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the progress control of the game is executed in response to the reception of the operation detection command, and the process proceeds to the step of Ss4.

  In the step of Ss4, when the acquired command is an internal winning command or a freeze command, referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The effect pattern selection process which sets and selects the selected effect pattern as the effect pattern of the said game in RAM91c is performed, and it progresses to the step of Ss5.

  In step Ss5, referring to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, the control pattern setting for reading the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the acquired command and setting it in the RAM 91c The process is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss6.

  In step Ss6, effect control processing 1 for controlling various effect devices such as effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed according to the control pattern set in step Ss14, and the process proceeds to step Ss7.

  In step Ss7, an operation detection process 2 for monitoring whether or not an operation switch not involved in the game progress control has been operated for a predetermined time is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss8.

In Ss8 step, thus including the detection state of the operation switch which is not involved in the set advanced control of the control pattern and the game at step SS14, stage effect LED 52, a speaker 53, a control of various effects device such as a reel LED The effect control process 2 to be performed is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss9.

  In step Ss9, after the process of updating the values of various counters is performed, the timer interrupt process (sub) is terminated.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the operation detection process 1 executed in the timer interrupt process (sub) described above by the sub CPU 91a.

  In the operation detection process 1, it is determined whether or not the command acquired in step Ss2 is an operation detection command (Ss201). If the command is not an operation detection command, it is further determined whether or not the acquired command is a door command (Ss202). If it is a door command, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is determined in step Ss201 or Ss202 that the command is neither an operation detection command nor a door command, it is determined whether there is a switch that is set to ON as the current state of the detection state storage area (Ss203). If none of the current states is set to ON, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is determined in step Ss203 that there is a switch that is set to ON as the current state, that is, it is neither an operation detection command nor a door command without receiving an operation detection command indicating that it has changed from ON to OFF. If a command is received, the current state is updated to OFF (Ss204), and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is determined that the command acquired in step Ss201 is an operation detection command, the detection state of the corresponding operation switch in the detection state storage area is updated in accordance with the change in the detection state indicated by the operation detection command (Ss205). Then, an operation detection flag indicating that the operation of the operation switch indicated by the operation detection command is detected is set (Ss206), and the process proceeds to step Ss207. The operation detection flag set in step Ss206 is cleared in step Ss209, which will be described later, or the change in detection state of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is confirmed by the operation detection flag in the effect control process 2. It is cleared by doing.

  In step Ss207, the updated detection state storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the detection state of the operation switch indicated by the operation detection flag has changed from OFF to ON. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is determined in step Ss207 that the state has changed from OFF to ON, the updated detection state storage area is referenced to determine whether or not the previous state is OFF (Ss208), and the previous state is not OFF. In this case, that is, when the operation detection command indicating the change from OFF to ON is received without receiving the operation detection command indicating the change from ON to OFF, the operation detection flag is cleared (Ss209). Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is determined in step Ss208 that the previous state is OFF, the time lapse flag is cleared (Ss210), the value of the operation time counter is initialized (set to 0) (Ss211), and the flowchart of FIG. Return to.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the control content of the operation detection process 2 executed by the sub CPU 91a in the timer interrupt process (sub) described above.

  In the operation detection process 2, it is determined whether or not there is an operation switch whose current state is ON by referring to the detection state storage area (Ss601). If there is no operation switch whose current state is ON, FIG. 50 shows. Return to the flowchart.

  If there is an operation switch whose current state is ON in step Ss601, the value of the operation time counter of the operation switch whose current state is ON is referred to, and whether or not 10 seconds have passed since the operation switch was turned ON. (Ss602) If 10 seconds have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Ss604, and if 10 seconds have elapsed, a 10-second elapsed flag is set (Ss603), and the process proceeds to step Ss604.

  In step Ss604, the value of the operation time counter of the operation switch whose current state is ON is referred to, and it is determined whether or not 5 seconds have elapsed since the operation switch was turned ON. The process proceeds to step Ss606, and if 5 seconds have elapsed, a 5-second elapsed flag is set (Ss605), and the process proceeds to step Ss606.

  In step Ss606, the value of the operation time counter of the operation switch whose current state is ON is referred to, and it is determined whether or not 3 seconds have elapsed since the operation switch was turned ON. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG. 50, if 3 seconds have elapsed, a 3 second elapsed flag is set (Ss607), and the flow returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  These time lapse flags are cleared by confirming the continuous operation time of the operation switches that are not involved in the game progress control in the effect control process 2.

  As described above, the first embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the first embodiment, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included.

  In the first embodiment, a slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine for setting bets using game balls, It may be a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls and a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out by winning.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game state command to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a standby command, an abort command, an error command, a return command, a setting start command, a confirmation start command, a confirmation end command, and an operation detection command.

  The operation detection command of this embodiment is a command indicating the detection state (ON / OFF) of the operation switches (single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R). , Transmitted at regular intervals.

  Among these commands, a setting start command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, and a return command are generated at a stage before an interrupt is permitted in the startup process and stored in a specific command transmission buffer assigned to a special work in the RAM 41c. The commands other than the setting start command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, the return command, and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the game process, and are usually provided in the special work of the RAM 41c. It is temporarily stored in the command transmission buffer and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated. In addition, addresses (0 to 15) are assigned to the storage areas for the respective commands. Further, in the command transmission buffer, a transmission pointer indicating an address of an area in which a command to be transmitted next is stored and a storage pointer indicating an address of an area in which the command is to be stored next are set. The transmission pointer is incremented by 1 each time an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted (cleared to 0 when overflowed), and the storage pointer is 1 when storing the command. It is added (cleared to 0 when it overflows), and when all untransmitted commands are transmitted, and all areas of the normal command transmission buffer are full with untransmitted commands. The address indicated by the transmission pointer and the address of the storage pointer are the same number. If an unsent command is stored, the unsent flag is set. Therefore, if the address indicated by the send pointer and the address of the stored pointer are the same number, the unsent flag is set. If the untransmitted flag is not set, it is indicated that the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands, and that the untransmitted command is empty.

  The main CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 at intervals of 0.56 ms, and executes a timer interrupt process (main) when the interrupt 3 occurs, so the timer interrupt process (main) is executed every 0.56 ms. Will be. In the timer interrupt process (main), timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to these timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. . Since the command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is executed by the timer interrupt 2, the command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) in which the command is executed at intervals of 1.12 ms. Therefore, every time the main CPU 41a executes the timer interrupt process (main), that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally. There is.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once every four timer interrupt processes (main), that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. By transmitting only one of the commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer, even when a plurality of commands are transmitted continuously, they will be transmitted with an interval of at least 2.24 ms. These continuously transmitted commands can be reliably acquired on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  In this embodiment, a command is generated in the game process and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. When an untransmitted command stored in the command transmission buffer is detected in the command transmission processing in the timer interrupt 2, the untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  In addition, the normal command transmission buffer has an area where a plurality of commands can be stored, so that newly generated commands can be stored without waiting for transmission of unsent commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer. Normally, it can be stored in an empty area of the command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer.

  In addition, when commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer in the game process, these commands are stored in the order of generation, and in the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order generated and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It has become. That is, the commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated and stored.

  The operation detection command is generated every time the command transmission process is executed five times, stored in the aforementioned specific command transmission buffer, and immediately transmitted. In addition, when the operation detection command transmission time is reached with the unsent command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, priority is given to the transmission of the operation detection command and the normal command transmission buffer stores it. The untransmitted command is transmitted in the next command transmission process, and a plurality of commands are not transmitted in one command transmission process.

  The main CPU 41a of this embodiment performs a timer interrupt process (main) executed by interrupting the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R at regular time intervals. It is detected in the switch input determination process to be executed. The switch input determination process of the present embodiment is the same as the switch input determination process 2 of the first embodiment described above, when the operation switch detection state is monitored and any of the operation switches changes from OFF to ON. Edge data (rising edge) indicating that the operation switch to be changed from OFF to ON is set, and when the operation switch is changed from ON to OFF, edge data (rising edge) indicating that the corresponding operation switch has changed from ON to OFF. Set the (downward edge).

  Then, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the operation switch has been operated based on whether or not the rising edge of the operation switch related to the progress control of the game is set in accordance with the current control state in the game process. If it is determined and the operation switch is determined to be operated, all edge data is cleared, the game progress control according to the operation switch operation is executed, and a command associated with the game progress control is executed. (BET command, internal winning command, reel stop command, etc.) are set in the normal command transmission buffer.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the rising edge of the stop switch corresponding to the reel being rotated is set in the reel rotation processing, the main CPU 41a determines whether the detection state of the other operation switches is ON, If it is determined that the detection state of the operation switch is ON, that is, if an operation of a stop switch corresponding to a rotating reel is detected while another operation switch is being operated, the stop operation is valid. Therefore, stop control of the corresponding reel is not performed.

  This is because, when two or more operations are detected among the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, if priority is given to the stop control based on one of the operations, the other stop control is delayed, and the stop mode of the reel This is because there is a possibility that a problem such as unnaturalness may occur, and even if the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is detected while the other operation switches are operated as described above, By not performing the stop control of the reel to be performed, the stop control of the other reel is not delayed by the stop control of the one reel.

  Further, when the main CPU 41a determines that the rising edge of the stop switch corresponding to the reel being rotated is set in the reel rotation process, the detection state of the other operation switches is not limited to the other stop switches. If the detection state of any of the other operation switches is determined to be ON, the effective stop operation is not performed and the corresponding reel stop control is not performed. Therefore, without extracting only the detection state of the stop switch from the detection state of the operation switch, for example, when ON is set to 1 and OFF is set to 0, the sum of the detection states of all the operation switches is calculated, and 2 or more If so, it is possible to collectively determine the detection states of all the operation switches, such as determining that the other operation switches are in the detection state.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the rising edge of the start switch 7 for determining the set value is set at a stage where the set value has not yet been determined in the setting change state, the other operation switch It is determined whether or not the detection state is ON, and if it is determined that the detection state of any of the other operation switches is ON, control for determining the set value is not performed.

  This is because, as will be described later, the operation switch used by the main CPU 41a for controlling the progress of the game is diverted as the operation means in the manager mode controlled on the sub CPU 91a side in the setting change state. As shown in FIG. 5, when the set value is not yet confirmed, even if the start switch 7 for confirming the set value is operated while another operation switch is being operated, the set value confirmation control is not performed. Even if the start switch 7 is mistakenly operated simultaneously with the operation of the administrator mode, the setting value is not fixed and the setting value is not set, so that the administrator does not expect it. The setting value is not finalized, and the troublesomeness of having to turn off the power again and change the setting from the beginning can be reduced by mistake. Going on.

  The main CPU 41a executes a command transmission process for transmitting a command to the sub CPU 91a during the timer interrupt process (main). In the command transmission process, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, that is, whether or not a command associated with game progress control is stored, and the command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. If it is determined that the game is in progress, the command associated with the progress control of the game stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a.

  In the command transmission process, it is determined whether or not the operation detection command is transmitted. If the operation detection command is transmitted, the single BET switch 5 is used regardless of whether or not the detection state of the operation switch is changed. , MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R acquisition data indicating the detection state, and based on the acquired determination data, single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop An operation detection command capable of specifying the ON / OFF state of each of the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is created, set in the specific command transmission buffer, and immediately transmitted to the sub CPU 91a. Whether or not it is time to transmit the operation detection command is determined by referring to the value of the transmission counter assigned to the RAM 41c. The transmission counter is decremented by 1 each time the command transmission process is executed, and when the value becomes 0, it is specified that the operation detection command is transmitted. In the embodiment, 5) is set. For this reason, in this embodiment, every time the command transmission process is executed five times, the operation detection command is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a based on the determined data at that time.

  As described above, the command transmission process is executed once every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed four times. Therefore, the operation detection command is executed every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed 20 times. Since the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is about 0.56 ms, the main CPU 41a transmits to the sub CPU 91a once every about 11.2 ms.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is generated by acquiring the fixed data of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, but it is detected in the port input process. The input data of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R may be acquired to create an operation detection command.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends an operation detection command to the sub CPU 91a that can specify that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. So that the sub CPU 91a can identify that the operation switch detected by the main CPU 41a has been operated regardless of whether or not the sub CPU 91a is an operation switch related to the progress control of the game in each control state. It is possible to produce effects according to the operation of the operation switches that are not involved in the progress control of the game.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a performs the single-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, regardless of whether any one of them is operated. By periodically transmitting operation detection commands that can specify the ON / OFF states of the start switch 7 and stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the sub CPU 91a periodically determines the ON / OFF states of these operation switches. Even when the sub CPU 91a misses the operation detection command, it is possible to specify the latest detection state for all the operation switches based on the operation detection command transmitted next time. , According to the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control It is possible to reliably execute the production.

  In particular, in the continuous operation effect described in the first embodiment, the winning of the special role is not notified unless the MAXBET switch 6 is operated 10 times including the first operation within 5 seconds from the first operation of the MAXBET switch 6. If the sub CPU 91a misses the operation detection command, if it is not reflected, the winning of the special role will not be notified even though the player has operated the MAXBET switch 6 ten times continuously within 5 seconds. Although there is a possibility, when the main CPU 41a periodically transmits an operation detection command as in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a can periodically specify the ON / OFF state of the operation switch, thereby detecting the operation. Even if a command is missed, the latest detection status is acquired from the operation control information sent next time to determine whether the notification condition is satisfied. Because it is, it is possible to prevent the player despite were satisfy operation of the announcement, the winner of the special role by the omission of the operation detection command no longer be announced.

  Further, since it is possible to specify the detection state of all the single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from the operation detection command, a plurality of switches are provided on the sub CPU 91a side. It is possible to produce effects reflecting the operation status of a plurality of operation switches, such as simultaneous operation of a single switch or operation of only a specific switch, and it is possible to produce various effects using operation of the operation switches.

  In addition, the operation detection command is not transmitted every time a timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main CPU 41a at regular intervals is executed, but the timer interrupt process (main) is performed a predetermined number of times ( Since this is transmitted every time it is executed (in this embodiment, 20 times), it is possible to prevent the load on the main CPU 41a from being extremely increased by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a controls the one-sheet BET switch 5 regardless of whether one of the one-BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, or the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated. , MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is configured to transmit an operation detection command that can specify the ON / OFF state at regular intervals. Only when (ON / OFF) changes, an operation detection command indicating that may be transmitted. With such a configuration, transmission of the operation detection command can be reduced as much as possible. In addition to reducing the control load associated with the detection command transmission, the sub CPU 91a can be operated more than necessary. Out of need without receiving a command.

  Further, when the detection state (ON / OFF) of any operation switch changes, an operation detection command that can specify the detection state of another operation switch in addition to the detection state of the operation switch is sent to the sub CPU 91a. It is also possible to have a configuration for transmission, and with this configuration, transmission of operation detection commands can be reduced as much as possible, and the sub CPU 91a detects the detection state of the operation switch whose detection state has changed from the operation detection command. In addition, the detection state of other operation means can be specified, and the sub CPU 91a can perform effects reflecting the operation statuses of a plurality of operation means. Can be anything.

  When the operation detection command is transmitted in the command transmission process, the main CPU 41a does not transmit the command in the normal command transmission buffer even if an untransmitted command remains in the normal command transmission buffer, and the normal command transmission buffer. An untransmitted command set to is transmitted in the next command transmission process. That is, when the operation detection command transmission time comes when the untransmitted command is set in the normal command transmission buffer, priority is given to the transmission of the operation detection command.

  Even if the command in the normal command transmission buffer is not transmitted in a certain command transmission process, it will be transmitted in the next command transmission process, so the timing of the production will not be greatly delayed. Since it is transmitted every time the command transmission process is executed five times, if the operation detection command is not transmitted in the command transmission process when the operation detection command has been transmitted, the state of the previous operation switch detection state Although the interval until the difference is specified becomes longer than the transmission interval of the original operation detection command, there is a possibility that the timing of the production will be greatly delayed, but in this embodiment, as described above, the normal command Since the transmission of the operation detection command has priority over the untransmitted command in the transmission buffer, the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is given. The delay in production due to the operation of the H can be suppressed as much as possible, and even when the command is continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the sub CPU 91a, the command transmission process is always executed after the command transmission process is executed. Since commands are transmitted one by one with an interval until execution, the sub CPU 91a can reliably receive the commands.

In addition, the command accompanying the game progress control is temporarily set in the normal command transmission buffer in the game processing and transmitted in the subsequent command transmission processing, whereas the operation detection command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. Is not set, and it is set and transmitted in a specific command transmission buffer different from that, and it is transmitted at regular intervals based on the transmission timing of commands that are irregularly transmitted based on game progress control Even if the transmission timing of the operation detection command to be performed overlaps, the transmission control of these commands is not complicated. In particular, as in the present embodiment, when the transmission timing of the command that is irregularly transmitted based on the game progress control and the transmission timing of the operation detection command transmitted at regular intervals overlap, In giving priority to one of the commands, it is possible to give priority to transmission of one command only by performing control for designating the address of one of the command transmission buffers. Further, usually as a command transmission buffer is capable of storing a plurality of commands, despite adopts a configuration (so-called queue) that transmits the further stored in The first command is stored after If you try to prioritize the operation detection command, it will be necessary to change the transmission order, etc., and transmission control will become extremely complicated. However, the operation detection command will not be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. Such a problem does not occur by adopting the configuration.

  In this embodiment, in the command transmission process, the transmission of the operation detection command is prioritized over the untransmitted command in the normal command transmission buffer, but it is determined whether or not the operation detection command transmission time is reached in the command transmission process. Before sending the command, determine whether an unsent command is set in the normal command send buffer. If there are unsent commands in the normal command send buffer, set them in the send buffer for the normal command. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an operation detection command is not transmitted in the same command transmission processing, that is, a configuration in which transmission of an untransmitted command in the normal command transmission buffer is prioritized over an operation detection command. As a result, the detection state of the operation switch changed according to the game progress control. It is possible to prevent the operation detection command sent regardless of whether, i.e. whether effect is performed is delayed by the transmission of commands indicating an indeterminate state.

  In addition, when an untransmitted command is set in the normal command transmission buffer at the operation detection command transmission time, both commands may be transmitted in the same command transmission processing. In this case, it is possible to prevent the timing of the effects from being delayed for both effects according to the progress control of the game and effects associated with the operation of the operation switch not involved in the progress control of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 53, the main CPU 41a executes a start-up process when the reset signal is turned OFF and starts up, and an interrupt is permitted at the end of the start-up process. Thereafter, a timer interrupt process (main ) At regular intervals. If the main CPU 41a can return to the state before the power interruption, as shown in FIG. 53A, a return command is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a before the interruption is permitted in the activation process. If the main CPU 41a cannot return to the state before the power interruption due to an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 41c, an error command indicating the RAM abnormality is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a before the interruption is permitted in the startup process. To do. When the setting key switch 37 is ON and the RAM 41c is initialized and does not return to the state before the power interruption, as shown in FIG. A setting start command is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a before. Among the commands transmitted in the activation process, the return command specifies that the main CPU 41a returns to the state before power interruption, and the error command indicating the RAM abnormality and the setting start command indicate that the main CPU 41a is before power interruption. That is, it is specified that the state does not return to the state.

  As described above, the operation detection command is transmitted in the timer interruption process (main), and the interruption process is not permitted until the end of the activation process. Therefore, after the main CPU 41a is activated, the main CPU 41a is not disconnected. Operation is detected after sending a return command that specifies that the state is to be restored to the state of the main CPU 41a, or an error command that indicates that the main CPU 41a is not returned to the state before power interruption, or a setting start command. Command transmission is permitted.

  In this way, the main CPU 41a determines that it will not return to the state before power interruption after power-on, and transmits an error command indicating a RAM abnormality to the sub CPU 91a, or returns to the state before power interruption and returns to the state. Since the operation detection command is not transmitted to the sub CPU 91a until the sub CPU 91a is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a, the sub CPU 91a identifies the operation detection command from the operation detection command regardless of whether or not the main CPU 41a is to be restored. It is possible to prevent an effect that does not match the state of the main CPU 41a from being executed when the power is turned on.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a transmits a return command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, and a setting start command to the sub CPU 91a in the startup process, and then executes a timer interrupt process (main) by permitting the interrupt. In the command transmission process, an operation detection command is transmitted, and it is determined whether a return command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, and a setting start command have already been transmitted in the command transmission process. In the command transmission process, the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, and the setting start command can be transmitted prior to the operation detection command.

  In this embodiment, the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, and the setting start command are transmitted to the sub CPU 91a in the startup process, and the operation detection command is transmitted in the command transmission process. , A return command, an error command indicating a RAM error, or a setting start command is set in the specific command transmission buffer, and after an interrupt is permitted, an error command indicating a RAM error is first set in the command transmission process. It is determined whether or not any of the commands is set in the specific command transmission buffer. If either of the error command indicating the RAM abnormality or the setting start command is set, the sub CPU 91a is given the highest priority. Either an error command indicating a RAM error or a setting start command The operation detection command may be transmitted on the condition that it is not set. Even in such a configuration, the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, and the setting start command are transmitted before the operation detection command. can do.

  In the startup process, any of the return command, error command indicating a RAM error, and setting start command is set in the normal command transmission buffer. In the command transmission process, the return command, the error command indicating a RAM error, and the setting start command Until one of them is sent, the sending of the operation detection command is prohibited, and the sending of the operation detection command is permitted on condition that one of the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, or the setting start command is sent. The operation detection command may be transmitted from the subsequent command transmission processing. Even in such a configuration, the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, and the setting start command are transmitted before the operation detection command. Can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a is prohibited from interrupting during the timer interrupt process (main), and even if a voltage drop signal is input during that time, the main CPU 41a is interrupted until the timer interrupt process (main) ends. The process (main) is not executed, and the power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed after the timer interrupt process (main) is completed.

  Multiple commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer, and the power interruption interrupt processing (main) is executed even when untransmitted commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the case of returning to the state before the power interruption at the time of subsequent activation, the normal command transmission buffer is restored with an untransmitted command remaining.

  On the other hand, when the operation detection command is the operation detection command transmission time in the command transmission process, the operation detection command is created and transmitted in the command transmission process. And since the command transmission process is executed in the timer interrupt process (main), there is no operation detection command that has not been transmitted at the time of power interruption. It does not return with the transmission operation detection command remaining.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption when the main CPU 41a is activated, the normal command transmission buffer stores the normal command transmission buffer. The unsent command stored in the command transmission buffer will also be restored, but the operation detection command will not be sent before the power interruption, and will not be sent before the power interruption. The operation detection command is not returned, and an operation detection command that does not reflect the detection state of the operation switch after the return is not transmitted. For this reason, after the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent an effect corresponding to an operation not related to the progress control of the game from being executed even though the operation switch is not operated at all.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the operation detection command is transmitted without being stored in the normal command transmission buffer in which a command corresponding to the progress control of the game is set. It is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated when only the command corresponding to the progress control is restored and the operation detection command is not restored.

  In this embodiment, when the operation detection command is the transmission timing of the operation detection command in the command transmission process, the operation detection command is created and transmitted within the command transmission process, and the timer interrupt process ( During the execution of (main), the power interruption interrupt processing is prohibited, so that the operation detection command is not sent before the power interruption. Although the command does not return, when there is an operation detection command that has not been transmitted at startup, the operation detection command that has not been transmitted is detected by clearing the operation detection command that has not been transmitted. A configuration in which the command does not return may be used. In this case, the command transmission buffer data in which the operation detection command is stored is configured such that the command corresponding to the progress control of the game and the operation detection command are stored in different command transmission buffers. By clearing only the operation detection command, it becomes possible to clear the operation detection command, and there is no need to change the transmission order of the commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer.

  In this embodiment, every time the command transmission process is executed five times in the timer interrupt process (main), that is, the command transmission process is executed in the timer interrupt 2 executed every four times of the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, an operation detection command is transmitted every 20 timer interruption processes (main). For this reason, it is possible to specify the timing at which the main CPU 41a is activated (the timing at which the reset signal is turned off) and the timing at which the interrupt is permitted from the number of times the operation detection command is transmitted and the operation detection command transmission interval. When the random number counter included in the main CPU 41a is initialized at startup and updated every subsequent timer interrupt process (main), or after initialization at startup and updated at regular intervals (clock signal input, etc.) In addition, if the timing at which the main CPU 41a is activated or the timing at which the interrupt is permitted is specified, the current random number counter value may be specified, and the specified random number counter value may be used for fraud. If the value of the random number counter is related to the game, there is a risk that a significantly unfair result will be obtained.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption at the time of activation, the main CPU 41a also restores the value of the transmission counter before the power interruption, from the value of the transmission counter before the power interruption. When the number of command transmission processes is counted and the value of the transmission counter reaches 0, that is, when the command transmission process executed after executing the command transmission process before power interruption reaches 5 times, After that, after the activation of the main CPU 41a as shown in FIG. 53A, the operation detection command is transmitted every five command transmission processes. The number of command transmission processes executed until the first operation detection command is transmitted is not constant, and it is necessary until the first operation detection command is transmitted from the start of the main CPU 41a. Since the time (t1) to be set is not constant, the timing at which the main CPU 41a is activated (the timing at which the reset signal is turned off) and the interrupt are permitted based on the number of times the operation detection command is transmitted and the operation detection command transmission interval. It becomes difficult to specify the timing, and it is possible to prevent fraud associated with specifying the timing when the main CPU 41a is activated and the timing when the interrupt is permitted.

  In addition, when the main CPU 41a initializes the RAM 41c at the time of activation, the value of the transmission counter before power interruption is also initialized. In this case, any value from the range of 0 to 3 is set. A value is selected at random, a value obtained by adding 1 to the selected value is set in the transmission counter, and the number of times of command transmission processing is counted from the value, and when the value of the transmission counter becomes 0, that is, 1 at startup When the command transmission process of the number of times randomly selected from ~ 4 is executed, the first operation detection command is transmitted after startup, and thereafter, the operation detection command is transmitted every five command transmission processes. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), after the activation of the main CPU 41a, after the interrupt is permitted, it is executed until the first operation detection command is transmitted. The number of command transmission processes is not constant, and the time (t1 ′) required from when the main CPU 41a is started until the first operation detection command is transmitted is not constant. From the transmission interval, it becomes difficult to specify the timing at which the main CPU 41a is activated (the timing when the reset signal is turned off) and the timing at which the interrupt is permitted. It is possible to prevent fraud that accompanies identification of the timing made.

  In this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a is activated, when the state before power interruption is restored, the transmission timing of the operation detection command is counted from the value of the transmission counter before power interruption, and the RAM 41c is initialized. The transmission counter value is randomly selected and the operation detection command transmission timing is counted, so that the time required from when the main CPU 41a is activated until the first operation detection command is transmitted is not constant. However, in any case, the time required from when the main CPU 41a is activated until the first operation detection command is transmitted by randomly selecting the value of the transmission counter and counting the transmission timing of the operation detection command. It is good also as a structure where is not constant.

  Also, a different value is set as the initial value of the transmission counter every time the main CPU 41a is activated, for example, 2 and 4 are alternately set every time the activation is started, or the initial value of the transmission counter is changed to 1, 2, By setting the initial value of the transmission counter according to a predetermined rule, such as setting in the order of 3, 4, 5, etc., the time required from when the main CPU 41a is activated until the first operation detection command is transmitted is constant. It is good also as composition which does not become.

  In the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91, a detection state storage area in which the change state of the detection state of the operation switch is stored for each operation switch, and an operation detection flag indicating that the operation state of the operation switch has changed are provided for each operation switch. An operation detection flag storage area to be stored is allocated. Furthermore, the detection state storage area is assigned with a detection state before receiving the operation detection command (previous) and a detection state after receiving the operation detection command (this time). The detection state of each operation switch before and after reception is stored.

  The sub CPU 91a performs the operation detection process 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (sub) that an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. In the operation detection process 1, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command is an operation detection command. If it is determined that the command is an operation detection command, the current detection state stored in the detection state storage area is changed to the previous detection state. , The detection state of each operation switch indicated by the operation detection command is stored as the current detection state, and when there is an operation switch in which the previous detection state and the current detection state are different, the state has changed from OFF to ON. In this case, a rising flag is set as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch, and when it is changed from ON to OFF, a falling flag is set as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a periodically transmits an operation detection command that can specify the detection states of all the operation switches regardless of whether or not the detection state of the operation switches has changed. When the CPU 91a receives the operation detection command, the CPU 91a updates the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command stored in the detection state storage area. An operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch is set, and the sub CPU 91a confirms the presence or absence of the operation detection flag, so that the detection state of the operation switch has changed, and before and after receiving the operation detection command. How the detection state of each operation switch has changed, that is, from OFF to ON, from ON to OFF Or phased's, which is to be able to determine.

  For this reason, the sub CPU 91a can perform an effect or change the effect according to not only the timing when the operation of the operation switch is started but also the timing when the operation is released, and is not involved in the progress control of the game. Various effects can be performed according to the operation mode of the operation switch.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a can determine how the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command has changed in addition to the change in the detection state of the operation switch. However, the sub CPU 91a may be configured to be able to determine only that the operation switch has been operated, that is, changed from OFF to ON. With such a configuration, the operation switch that does not affect the game progress control. It is possible to reduce the control load on the sub CPU 91a associated with the operation.

  The detection state storage area stores the detection state of each operation switch, and the sub CPU 91a is set with any operation detection flag, and the change in the detection state of the operation switch corresponding to the operation detection flag is changed. When it is identified, it is possible to identify not only the operation switch whose detection state has changed but also the detection state of other operation switches by checking the detection state of other operation switches in the detection state storage area. .

  For this reason, it becomes possible to specify the state in which a plurality of operation switches are operated at the same time. For example, a stage change effect described in the first embodiment can be performed by operating a plurality of operation switches at the same time. It becomes possible, and various productions can be performed depending on how the operation switches are operated.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a detects the left stop switch when the operation is performed by operating the operation switches of the left stop switch and the middle stop switch at the same time as the stage change effect, and the right stop switch is If an operation of the middle stop switch is detected in a state where it has not been detected, a stage change effect is performed, but an operation of the middle stop switch is detected while both the left stop switch and the right stop switch are detected. In this case, the operation of the left stop switch and the middle stop switch is detected at the same time as described above. In this case, the stage change effect is not performed.

  That is, when performing a specific performance according to an operation of a specific operation switch, if an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch, the specific performance is not performed. .

  For this reason, a specific performance based on the operation of a specific operation switch is executed when the specific operation switch is operated simultaneously with another operation switch or when the operation is performed while the other operation switch is operated. Since a specific effect is not executed by an incorrect operation, the specific effect can be executed only for a player who desires the specific effect.

  In addition, when an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch as described above, for example, the stage change effect described above or the table information browsing effect described later is performed by not performing the specific effect. Thus, even when some of the operation switches for executing each effect in a plurality of effects overlap, it is possible to execute different effects. For example, when there is a stage change effect executed by operating the left stop switch and the middle stop switch at the same time, and a stand information browsing effect executed by operating the middle stop switch and the right stop switch at the same time When the middle stop switch is operated while the left stop switch and the right stop switch are operated at the same time, the left stop switch and the middle stop switch are operated simultaneously, or the middle stop switch and the right stop switch are operated simultaneously. It becomes impossible to determine whether it is an operation, and it is possible to assign an effect only to one of the simultaneous operations, but an operation switch other than a specific operation switch is operated together with a specific operation switch If you do not perform a specific performance, When it is possible to assign an effect to the operation, as in the case of the stage changes effect and the base information browsing effect, it is possible to perform more various effect by way of the operation of a plurality of operation switches.

  When the detection state of any one of the operation switches is changed from OFF to ON in the operation detection process 1, that is, when the operation of the operation switch is started, the sub CPU 91a corresponds to the corresponding operation among the operation time counters assigned to the RAM 91c. Initializes the switch operation time counter value. The value of the operation time counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process (sub) is executed, and the elapsed time since the operation switch operation started by referring to the value of the operation time counter Time can be determined.

  The sub CPU 91a executes the operation detection process 2 every time the timer interrupt process (sub) is executed. In the operation detection process 2, it is determined for each operation switch whether or not the current detection state stored in the detection state storage area is ON. If it is ON, that is, if the operation of the operation switch is continued. Refers to the value of the operation time counter of the corresponding operation switch, and if a predetermined time has elapsed, sets a time elapse flag indicating that to the operation switch. In this embodiment, a 3 second elapsed flag, a 5 second elapsed flag, and a 10 second elapsed flag are set as a time elapsed flag when 3 seconds have elapsed, 5 seconds have elapsed, and 10 seconds have elapsed.

  For this reason, the sub CPU 91a can perform an effect upon confirming whether the time passage flag is set or not when a certain time has elapsed since the operation switch has been operated continuously.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a counts the time elapsed after the operation switch detection state has changed from OFF to ON, and the operation switch detection state has not changed from ON to OFF. It becomes possible to grasp the continuous operation time of the operation switch on the CPU 91a side, and without having a timer for measuring the continuous operation time for each individual switch on the main CPU 41a side, it is only necessary to change the program of the sub CPU 91a. It is possible to detect the continuous operation time, but after the operation switch operation is changed from OFF to ON on the main CPU 41a side, the time elapsed without changing from ON to OFF is counted, and this time is a predetermined time. By sending a command indicating that the operation switch has been operated continuously for a specified time when reaching In U91a side, it may be able to identify that the operation of the operation switch is operated continuously.

  In addition, when the detection state of any one of the operation switches is changed from OFF to ON in the operation detection process 1, that is, when the operation of the operation switch is started, the sub CPU 91a corresponds to the continuous operation counter assigned to the RAM 91c. 1 is added to the value of the continuous operation counter of the operation switch to be operated. The value of the continuous operation counter is cleared by a command from the sub CPU 91a when the detection state of another operation switch changes from OFF to ON or at the start of production, etc. Refer to the value of the continuous operation counter It is possible to determine the number of times that a specific operation switch has been operated continuously from the starting point. Then, the sub CPU 91a checks the value of the continuous operation counter, thereby making it possible to produce an effect when the number of continuous operation of the operation switch from a certain starting point has reached the specified number.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a counts the number of times that the detection state of the operation switch has changed from OFF to ON, so that the sub CPU 91a can grasp the number of continuous operation switch operations, and the main CPU 41a side. Thus, without having a counter for counting the number of continuous operations for each individual switch, it is possible to detect the number of operations of the operation switch only by changing the program of the sub CPU 91a. Is counted, and when the number of times reaches the specified number, a command indicating that the operation switch has been operated a specified number of times is transmitted, so that the operation of the operation switch is performed on the sub CPU 91a side. It may be possible to specify that the operation has been performed a specified number of times.

  A control pattern storage area in which a control pattern is set is assigned to the RAM 91c of the sub control unit 91, and when the sub CPU 91a receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub CPU 91a controls the control pattern according to the command. While setting in the pattern storage area, the output state of the rendering device is controlled with reference to the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 54A, when the sub CPU 91a receives a command a corresponding to the progress control of the game, the pattern a corresponding to the command a is set in the control pattern storage area, and at the same time, the effect device To an output state based on the pattern a. As a result, an image based on the pattern a is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, sound effects based on the pattern a are output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the effect effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 are turned on based on the pattern a. Thereafter, when a command b corresponding to the progress control of the game is received, the control pattern in the control pattern storage area is updated to the pattern b corresponding to the command b, and when the control pattern in the control pattern storage area is changed, At the same time, the rendering device is controlled to the output state based on the changed pattern b. As a result, the image based on the pattern a displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is updated to the image based on the pattern b, sound effects based on the pattern b are output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the effect effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 are displayed on the pattern b. It becomes a lighting mode based on. Further, as shown in FIG. 54B, when the corresponding control pattern receives the same command c as the command a, the control pattern in the control pattern storage area is updated to the pattern a corresponding to the command c. The control pattern of the area itself does not change. In this case, the state is maintained without switching the output state of the effect device.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a is activated before the main CPU 41a when the power is turned on, and if the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a is always transmitted when the main CPU 41a is activated as shown in FIG. Even if the command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, or the setting start command is not received, the control state of the sub CPU 91a is returned to the control state before the power interruption, but the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality or the setting start is started. Until one of the commands is received, the output control according to the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area is not performed, and the output control according to the recovery pattern A for notifying that the recovery process is in progress is performed. . As a result, a restoring image indicating that the restoration process is in progress is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the effect effect LED 52 is turned off. Note that there is no output of sound effects from the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 is also turned off. After that, when a return command is received, output control is performed according to the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area, and the output state of the rendering device is set from the recovering pattern A to the control pattern storage area at this time. The output state is switched according to the control pattern being set. As a result, the restoring image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is updated to an image based on the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area, and the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area is changed from the speakers 53 and 54. Based on the sound effect, the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 are turned on based on the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area.

  When a return command is received, an operation history consisting of the detection state of the operation switch set in the detection state storage area, the operation detection flag, the operation time counter value, the time elapsed flag, and the continuous operation counter value The detection state and operation history of the operation switch based on the operation detection flag received before the power interruption are not restored even when a return command is received.

  Further, if the data in the RAM 91c is not normal at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a, as shown in FIG. 56, is any of a return command that is always transmitted when the main CPU 41a is activated, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, or a setting start command. Even if not received, the RAM 91c is initialized and the corresponding pattern 0 (normal screen display etc.) is set in the control pattern storage area after initialization, but the return command, error command indicating RAM abnormality or setting start command Until either one is received, output control according to the pattern 0 set in the control pattern storage area is not performed, and output control according to the recovery pattern B for notifying that recovery processing is being performed is performed. As a result, the restoration-in-progress image same as the restoration-in-progress pattern A is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Note that, as in the recovery pattern A, no sound effect is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 is also turned off. After that, when a return command is received, output control is performed according to the pattern 0 set in the control pattern storage area, and at this time, the output state of the rendering device is set from the recovering pattern B to the control pattern storage area The output state is switched according to the pattern 0. As a result, the restoring image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is updated to the normal screen based on the control pattern 0, no sound effect is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the effect effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 are turned off. Become.

  If the data in the RAM 91c is not normal, an output state until receiving any of a return command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, or a setting start command is used as the recovery pattern A when the data in the RAM 91c is normal. Is configured to perform output control in accordance with the recovery pattern B having a different output mode. In the present embodiment, a restoration-in-progress image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for both the restoration patterns A and B, no sound effect is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 is turned off. In the pattern A, the effect effect LED is turned off, whereas in the recovery pattern B, the effect effect LED is in a blinking state.

  In addition, an operation history including an operation switch detection state set in the detection state storage area with the initialization of the RAM 91c, an operation detection flag, an operation time counter value, a time elapsed flag, and a continuous operation counter value is also initialized. It becomes.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the setting start command after the activation, the data in the RAM 91c is normal and the control state is returned to the control state before the power interruption, as shown in FIG. When the RAM 91c is initialized, an administrator pattern for enabling access to management information described later is set in the control pattern storage area, and the control pattern in the control pattern storage area is changed to the administrator pattern, the production is almost simultaneously performed. The device is controlled to an output state corresponding to the manager pattern, and the output state of the rendering device is switched from the restoration pattern A to the output state based on the manager pattern. As a result, the restoration-in-progress image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is updated to the manager mode screen, a warning sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the effect effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 are in a blinking state.

  In addition, an operation history including an operation switch detection state set in the detection state storage area with the initialization of the RAM 91c, an operation detection flag, an operation time counter value, a time elapsed flag, and a continuous operation counter value is also initialized. It becomes.

  In addition, when the data in the RAM 91c is not normal and the RAM 91c is initialized and a setting start command is received, the pattern 0 set in the control pattern storage area is updated to the administrator pattern, and the control pattern storage area When the pattern 0 is changed to the manager pattern, the rendering device is controlled to the output state corresponding to the manager pattern almost simultaneously with this, and the output state of the rendering device is changed from the recovering pattern B to the manager pattern. Switch to based output state.

  In addition, an operation history including an operation switch detection state set in the detection state storage area with the initialization of the RAM 91c, an operation detection flag, an operation time counter value, a time elapsed flag, and a continuous operation counter value is also initialized. It becomes.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the error command indicating the RAM abnormality after the data in the RAM 91c is normal and the control state is returned to the control state before the power interruption, it is shown in FIG. Thus, the RAM 91c is initialized, an error pattern is set in the control pattern storage area, and when the control pattern storage area is changed to the error pattern, the rendering device is controlled to an output state corresponding to the error pattern almost simultaneously with this, The output state of the rendering device is switched from the recovering pattern A to the output state based on the error pattern. As a result, the in-restoration image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is updated to an error notification image, a warning sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the effect effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 are in a blinking state.

  In addition, an operation history including an operation switch detection state set in the detection state storage area with the initialization of the RAM 91c, an operation detection flag, an operation time counter value, a time elapsed flag, and a continuous operation counter value is also initialized. It becomes.

  If the RAM 91c data is not normal but the RAM 91c is initialized and an error command indicating a RAM abnormality is received, the pattern 0 set in the control pattern storage area is updated to an error pattern, and the control pattern is stored. When the area pattern 0 is changed to the error pattern, the rendering device is controlled to an output state corresponding to the error pattern almost simultaneously with this, and the output state of the rendering device is switched from the recovering pattern B to the output state based on the error pattern. .

  In addition, an operation history including an operation switch detection state set in the detection state storage area with the initialization of the RAM 91c, an operation detection flag, an operation time counter value, a time elapsed flag, and a continuous operation counter value is also initialized. It becomes.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a receives the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, or the setting start command after the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation and the control state is returned to the control state before the power interruption. If the return waiting time elapses, the control pattern before power interruption set in the control pattern storage area is saved as shown in FIG. 59, and a connection error with the game control board 40 is notified. When the control pattern before power interruption in the control pattern storage area is changed to the connection error pattern, the production device is controlled to the connection error notification output state almost simultaneously with this, and the production device output The state is switched from the recovery pattern A to the connection error notification output state. As a result, the restoration-in-progress image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is updated to the connection error notification screen, a warning sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the effect effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 are blinked.

  When the return waiting time has elapsed, an operation consisting of the detection state of the operation switch set in the detection state storage area, the operation detection flag, the operation time counter value, the time elapse flag, and the continuous operation counter value Initialize history.

  In this embodiment, even if the connection error state is entered, the RAM 91c is not cleared, and the control pattern before power interruption set in the control pattern storage area is also saved. If the data in the RAM 91c is normal when the power is turned off and then turned on again to restart the sub CPU 91a, the data held in the RAM 91c is subsequently received when the return command is received from the main CPU 41a. On the basis of this, the control state of the sub CPU 91a and the output state of the effect device are restored. When the return waiting time has elapsed, an operation consisting of the detection state of the operation switch set in the detection state storage area, the operation detection flag, the operation time counter value, the time elapse flag, and the continuous operation counter value. Since the history is initialized, it does not return.

  In addition, when the data in the RAM 91c is not normal and the recovery command wait time elapses without receiving a return command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, or a setting start command after initializing the RAM 91c, the control pattern is stored. The pattern 0 set in the area is updated to the connection error pattern, and when the pattern 0 in the control pattern storage area is changed to the connection error pattern, the rendering device is controlled to the connection error notification output state almost simultaneously with this, The output state of the effect device is switched from the restoring pattern B to the connection error notification output state.

  As described above, when the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a returns the control state to the control state before the power interruption, but the output state by the effect device until the return command is received from the main CPU 41a. Is not restored, and the output state is also restored when the return command is received, and only the output state by the rendering device may be restored without the main CPU 41a returning to the state before the power interruption. In addition, the control state on the main CPU 41a side when the power is turned on and the output state by the effect device can be matched.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a returns the control state to the control state before the power interruption when the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation, but receives the error command or the setting start command indicating the RAM abnormality from the main CPU 41a. That is, when the main CPU 41a side does not return to the state before the power interruption, the RAM 91c is initialized. Even when only the sub CPU 91a side can be restored when the power is turned on, the main CPU 41a and the sub CPU 91a The control state can be matched.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation. If the data is not normal, the sub CPU 91a initializes the RAM 91c without waiting for reception of a return command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, or a setting start command. When the pattern 0 is set in the control pattern storage area and then a return command is received, the output control of the effect device is performed in the output state corresponding to the pattern 0, and the sub CPU 91a performs data control in the RAM 91c. Even if it is not possible to return to the control state before the power interruption based on, the output of the effect device does not stop when the return command is received from the main CPU 41a, and the effect device according to the initialized control pattern Output control can be started.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a performs output control of the rendering device in accordance with the recovery pattern indicating that the recovery process is in progress until the sub CPU 91a receives any of the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, or the setting start command. Even after the power is turned on, the sub CPU 91a is currently in the state before the output of the rendering device according to the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area is started. Can be easily confirmed from the outside.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the sub CPU 91a returns to the control state before the power interruption and is waiting to receive any of the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, or the setting start command, the recovery is performed. While the output control of the effect device is performed according to the middle pattern A, the sub CPU 91a waits for reception of any of the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, or the setting start command with the RAM 91c initialized. If it is, the output control of the staging device is performed according to the recovering pattern B whose output mode is different from the recovering pattern A, and the output of the staging device in the output state of the recovering pattern From the aspect, it is possible to confirm from the outside whether the sub CPU 91a has returned to the control state before the power interruption or whether the RAM 91c has been initialized. That.

  Further, after the activation, the sub CPU 91a does not receive any of the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, or the setting start command, and the connection error notification is executed when the return waiting time has elapsed. Thus, it is possible to specify that the connection with the game control board 40 is defective.

  Further, even if the connection error notification is executed, the RAM 91c is not initialized, and when the power is turned on again, it is possible to return to the original control state by receiving a return command from the main CPU 41a. Yes.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a returns the control state to the control state before the power interruption when the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation, but receives the return information from the main CPU 41a and also returns the output state of the effect device. The operation history consisting of the operation switch detection status set in the detection status storage area, operation detection flag, operation time counter value, time elapsed flag, and continuous operation counter value is initialized. The operation switch detection state and operation history based on the received operation detection flag are not restored, and the operation switch does not participate in the game progress control even though the operation switch is not operated after the power is turned on. It is possible to prevent the performance according to the operation from being executed. For this reason, the effect in which the effect result is notified by the intervention operation that satisfies the effect conditions such as the special role selection suggesting effects 1 and 2 described above is performed when the intervention operation that satisfies the effect condition is performed even after the power is turned on. Since the production result is only notified to the player, the value of the production accompanying the intervention operation by the player can be increased, and the production condition is not determined across the power interruption, so the production condition is satisfied. Operation is easy to understand.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a receives the return command from the main CPU 41a when the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation and the control state is returned to the control state before the power interruption, that is, the control state of the main CPU 41a is also returned. The operation switch detection state and operation history are initialized when it is determined that the state on the sub CPU 91a side including the output state of the effect device is restored before the power interruption, and the main CPU 41a side is disconnected. Although all of the data in the RAM 91c is initialized without returning to the previous state, only the operation switch detection state and the operation history are not initialized unnecessarily. The operation switch detection state and operation history are initialized before all the states including the output state are restored. Detection state and operation history can reliably prevent the effect without being initialized will start.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a is configured to initialize the operation switch detection state and operation history at the time of activation, and is stored in the RAM 91c including the operation switch detection state and operation history at the time of power interruption. Since all the data is stored, it is not necessary to select data to be backed up in the process at the time of power interruption, and the process at the time of power interruption can be quickly terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the sub CPU 91a receives normal data from the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and returns the control state to the control state before power interruption, the sub CPU 91a receives the return command from the main CPU 41a. A configuration in which the detection state and operation history are initialized, but when the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of startup, a configuration in which the detection state and operation history of the operation switch are uniformly initialized without waiting for a return command to be received. In such a configuration, the detection state of the operation switch and the operation history are surely initialized at the previous stage regardless of whether or not the output state of the rendering device is restored. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the production from starting without initializing the detection state and operation history of these operation switches. Further, when a configuration is adopted in which the operation switch detection state and the operation history are uniformly initialized without waiting for the reception of the return command, the return command is transmitted when the main CPU 41a returns to the control state before the power interruption. It is good also as a structure which does not.

  Further, in this embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 91c is backed up at the time of power interruption, and the operation state of the operation switch before power interruption is initialized by the sub CPU 91a initializing the operation switch detection state and operation history at the time of activation. Although the detection status and operation history are not restored, the detection status and operation history of the operation switch before power failure can be prevented from being restored by not backing up the detection status and operation history of the operation switch at power failure. good.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the effects of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 22, the sub CPU 91 a has the right switch among the stop switches 8 </ b> L, 8 </ b> C, 8 </ b> R in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game. When the stop switches 8C and 8R are simultaneously operated, that is, when the detection state of the operation switch indicated by the operation detection command is one of the detection states of the stop switches 8C and 8R is OFF, the detection of the stop switches 8C and 8R When both the states are ON and the detection state of the stop switch 8L is changed to OFF, a stand information browsing effect such as a game history and effect information is executed.

  The RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 is allocated with a game history data storage area capable of storing game history data relating to already played games, and these game history data are based on commands transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Sequentially updated to the latest data. On the other hand, in the ROM 91 b of the sub-control unit 91, effect introduction data that introduces effects performed in the slot machine 1 is stored.

  The player simultaneously operates the right stop switches 8C, 8R among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game as described above. By displaying the browsing menu screen and further operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to select the menu, game history data stored in the game history data storage area of the RAM 91c (setting change to be described later) It is possible to browse game history information based on (excluding history) and effect introduction data stored in the ROM 91b.

  The game history data storage area includes a bonus game number counter, a bonus game number table, a total game number counter, a BB counter, an insertion number counter, a payout number counter, a time difference number table, a date-specific history table, and a setting value change table. Consists of

  The inter-bonus game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games since the end of the previous bonus, and is incremented by 1 every time a gaming state command is received in a state other than the bonus state, and shifts from the BB to the general gaming state. Cleared when the game state command shown is received.

  The inter-bonus game number table is a table that stores the number of inter-bonus games together with the type of bonus (BB (1) to (5)) for each bonus, and a game state command indicating a transition from the general gaming state to the BB. Is received, the type of bonus is stored, and the value of the game number counter between bonuses is acquired and stored as the number of games between bonuses.

  The total game number counter is a counter that counts the total number of games of today, and is incremented by 1 every time a game state command is received in a state other than the bonus state.

  The BB counter is a counter that counts the number of BBs of today for each type, and when the gaming state command indicating the transition from the general gaming state to the BB is received, the corresponding type is incremented by one.

  The inserted number counter is a counter that counts the number of medals used in the game, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When an internal winning command is received, the game starts according to the current gaming state. The required number of medals is added.

  The payout number counter is a counter that counts the number of medals paid out at the time of winning a small role, and when receiving a winning determination command indicating the win of a small role, the payout number specified by the command is added.

  The hourly difference sheet table is a table for storing a difference sheet at each predetermined interval (value of the dispensed sheet counter−value of the inserted sheet counter), and the value of the dispensed sheet counter at every predetermined interval (for example, every 5 minutes). The value of the insertion number counter is acquired, and the difference number is calculated and stored.

  The date-by-date history table is a table that stores data of a bonus game number table for the past three days, a total game number counter, a BB counter, an insertion number counter, a payout number counter, and a time difference number table. In the startup process (sub), the sub CPU 91a acquires date information from the clock device 97, and stores the acquired date information in the date storage area of the RAM 91c. Then, it is determined whether or not the date information newly acquired in the activation process matches the date information stored in the date storage area of the RAM 91c, and when it is determined that they do not match, that is, the date has been updated, The data stored in the area two days ago is stored in the area three days ago, the data stored in the area one day ago is stored in the area two days ago, and the data stored in the area today is 1 The data stored in the area of the previous day is cleared and the data stored in the area where the data of today is stored is cleared (initialized). That is, a process of storing each data of the inter-bonus game number table, the total game number counter, the BB counter, the inserted number counter, the payout number counter, and the hourly difference number table as data one day ago is performed.

  In addition, the bonus game number table, the total game number counter, the BB counter, the inserted number counter, the payout number counter, and the hourly difference number table data are stored in the date history table. The total game number counter, BB counter, insertion number counter, payout number counter, and hourly difference number table are cleared.

  The setting value change table is a table for storing setting value change histories for the past five times. When the game mode command is received in the state where the administrator mode is set, the time information ( The setting value indicated by the gaming state command is stored in association with the date and time. At this time, the oldest change history is cleared.

  Here, the browsing situation of game history information and effect introduction data and the control situation of the sub CPU 91a at that time will be described based on FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the right stop switch 8C, 8R among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is simultaneously operated in the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game, the liquid crystal display The browsing menu screen shown in FIG.

  The browsing menu screen has an explanation area for the currently selected menu, and a menu area consisting of “bonus information”, “introduction”, “bonus history”, “slump graph”, and “return”. The selection frame of the menu area is moved in accordance with the operation of the switches 8L and 8C, and the display content of the explanation area is also updated to the explanation of the currently selected menu area with this movement. Note that only the menu area corresponding to the setting state of the browsing effective flag set in the RAM 91c is displayed on the browsing menu screen, and “inter-bonus information” “direction introduction” “bonus history” “ In the “slump graph”, the menu area of the item for which the browsing valid flag is not set is not displayed. The browsing valid flag is set only for items that are set to enable browsing on the option screen described later, and for items that are not set to enable browsing on the option screen described later Cannot be browsed by the player's operation.

  When the menu area of “bonus information” is selected on the browsing menu screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the bonus information screen shown in FIG. 60B is displayed. On the bonus information screen, a menu area consisting of “Today”, “1 day ago”, “2 days ago”, “3 days ago”, and “Return”, and a bonus information and the number of bonus games for each bonus are displayed. And an area. When displaying the bonus information screen from the browse menu screen, the type of bonus and the number of bonus games for the bonus in the bonus information display area based on the data registered in the bonus game number table for today. Is displayed for each bonus. Further, when one of “1 day ago”, “2 days ago”, and “3 days ago” is selected on the inter-bonus information screen, if the stop switch 8R is operated, it is based on the data stored in the history data table by date. The type of bonus on the selected day and the number of bonus games are displayed in the bonus information display area for each bonus. Further, when the “return” is selected on the information screen between bonuses and the stop switch 8R is operated, the screen returns to the browsing menu screen.

  When the stop switch 8R is operated in a state where the menu area of “production introduction” is selected on the browsing menu screen, the production introduction screen shown in FIG. 60 (c) is displayed. On the bonus information screen, a menu area corresponding to each effect and a menu area corresponding to “return” are provided. When the stop switch 8R is operated in a state where any of the menu areas corresponding to each effect is selected on the effect introduction screen, the corresponding data is extracted from the effect introduction data stored in the ROM 91b and displayed. . In addition, when the “return” is selected on the effect introduction screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the viewing menu screen is displayed again.

  When the “bonus probability” menu area is selected on the browsing menu screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the bonus probability screen shown in FIG. 60 (d) is displayed. The bonus probability screen is provided with a menu area consisting of “Today”, “1 day ago”, “2 days ago”, “3 days ago”, and “Return”, and a bonus probability display area in which the probability is displayed for each bonus type. . When displaying the bonus probability screen from the browsing menu screen, the probability of today's BB is calculated based on the values of the total game number counter and BB counter of today and displayed in the bonus probability display area. Further, when the decision switch 57 is detected in a state where any one of “1 day ago”, “2 days ago”, and “3 days ago” is selected on the bonus probability screen, the selection is made based on the data stored in the history data table by date. The probability of BB on the selected day is calculated and displayed in the bonus probability display area. Further, when the “return” is selected on the bonus probability screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the browsing menu screen is displayed.

  When the “Slump graph” menu area is selected on the browsing menu screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the slump graph screen shown in FIG. 60 (e) is displayed. The slump graph screen includes a menu area including “today”, “1 day ago”, “2 days ago”, “3 days ago”, and “return”, and a graph display area in which a slump graph indicating the status of the difference ball in time series is displayed. , Is provided. When displaying the slump graph screen from the browsing menu screen, today's slump graph is generated based on today's hourly difference number table and displayed in the graph display area. In addition, if one of “1 day ago”, “2 days ago”, or “3 days ago” is selected on the slump graph screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the selection is made based on the data stored in the history data table by date. A slump graph for the selected day is generated and displayed in the graph display area. Further, when the “return” is selected on the slump graph screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the browsing menu screen is displayed.

  As described above, in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, the player operates the right stop switch 8C, 8R among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R simultaneously. Games based on game history data (excluding setting change history described later) stored in the game history data storage area of the RAM 91c by displaying the browsing menu screen and further operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R It is possible to browse history information and performance introduction data stored in the ROM 91b.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, when the setting key switch 37 is activated, the main CPU 41a transmits a setting start command to the sub CPU 91a to notify the start of the setting change state and to set the setting value. It will shift to a changeable setting change state. In the setting change state, the set value can be arbitrarily selected until the start switch 7 is operated. However, when the start switch 7 is operated, the set value selected at that time is fixed. Thereafter, a setting final state in which the setting value cannot be changed is entered. In this state, the setting key switch 37 is turned off to end the setting changing state, and a gaming state command is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a to change the setting changing state. Notify the end.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a is notified of the start of the setting change state by the setting start command, thereby clearing the above-described game history data, setting the game history data that can be browsed by the player, and viewing the setting change history. In other words, control is performed to an administrator mode in which management information on the sub CPU 91a side managed by the game store can be accessed. Then, the manager mode is ended when the end of the setting change state is notified by the game state command.

  Even if the setting value is confirmed in the setting change state, the main CPU 41a does not give any notification to the sub CPU 91a, and the sub CPU 91a changes the setting by the game state command even after the setting value is confirmed on the main CPU 41a side. Until the end of the status is notified, the administrator mode is continuously controlled. After the setting value is confirmed in the setting change state, the power is turned on again before the setting value is confirmed. The management information can be accessed without returning to the state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62, when the setting key switch 37 is turned on after the game is over and the setting key switch 37 is turned on as shown in FIG. 62, the main CPU 41a transmits a confirmation start command to the sub CPU 91a. And a transition to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state ends when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, and the confirmation confirmation command is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a to notify the end of the setting confirmation state.

  When the start of the setting confirmation state is notified by the confirmation start command, the sub CPU 91a can manage the management information on the side of the sub CPU 91a managed by the amusement store as in the case of receiving the setting start command. Control to user mode. The administrator mode ends when the end of the setting confirmation state is notified by the confirmation end command.

  The setting key switch 37 is a switch that can be turned ON / OFF by inserting and rotating the key, but the normal key is possessed by the store clerk and can be arbitrarily set by the player. 37 cannot be operated. That is, only when the setting key switch 37 that cannot be arbitrarily operated by the player is operated, the manager mode is controlled so that the management information on the sub CPU 91a side managed by the game store can be accessed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, not only when the main CPU 41a is controlled to the setting change state but also when the main CPU 41a is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the administrator mode is controlled. Access to management information is possible without migration. In particular, even if the setting change state is not entered unless the power is turned on again as in this embodiment, it is not necessary to turn off the power just to access the management information. Further, as in the present embodiment, even when the RAM 41c is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it is possible to access the management information while maintaining the stored data in the RAM 41c.

  In this embodiment, when a setting start command or a confirmation start command is received from the main CPU 41a, control is performed in the administrator mode as it is. However, after receiving a setting start command or a confirmation start command, For example, the configuration may be such that the administrator mode is controlled only when a certain operation is performed, for example, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated for a certain period of time or more. Although it is not necessary to access, it is possible to prevent the administrator mode from being controlled.

  Further, the main CPU 41a is configured to permit an interrupt before shifting to the setting change state, and periodically transmits an operation detection command while being controlled to the setting change state. While being controlled to the setting change state, the detection state of the operation switch that is not involved in the setting value change control can be sequentially specified.

  Further, interrupts are permitted even in the setting confirmation state, and since the operation detection command is periodically transmitted while being controlled to the setting confirmation state as in the setting change state, the sub CPU 91a enters the setting confirmation state. Even during the control, the detection state of the operation switch not involved in the setting value confirmation control can be sequentially specified.

  Further, as described above, the sub CPU 91a controls to the administrator mode in which the management information can be accessed during the period in which the main CPU 41a is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It is possible to perform an operation during the administrator mode period using the operation switch specified from the detection command, and an operation means for accessing the management information is separately provided on the production control board 90 side. However, originally, an operation for accessing the management information can be performed on the game control board 40 side using an operation switch used for controlling the progress of the game.

  Next, an operation situation when accessing the management information on the sub CPU 91a side and a control situation of the sub CPU 91a at that time will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the sub CPU 91a controls to the administrator mode when receiving a setting start command or a confirmation start command. Accordingly, an administrator mode screen shown in FIG. 63 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In this administrator mode screen, game history data is cleared and game history data that can be viewed by the player is displayed. The setting and setting change history can be browsed.

  Further, in the administrator mode, when a game state command or a confirmation end command is received, the stop mode is terminated and a predetermined menu area (a “return” menu area described later) displayed on the administrator mode screen is displayed on the stop switch 8L. , 8C is also ended when the stop switch 8R is operated in the state selected by 8C. In this case, it is continuously notified that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

  The administrator mode screen is provided with an explanation area for the currently selected menu and a menu area consisting of “history data clear”, “option”, “setting change history”, and “return”, and the stop switch 8L, In response to the operation of 8C, the selection frame of the menu area is moved, and the display content of the explanation area is also updated to the explanation of the currently selected menu area with this movement.

  As shown in FIG. 63A, when the “history data clear” menu area is selected on the administrator mode screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the history data clear screen shown in FIG. 64A is displayed. Let The history data clear screen is provided with an explanation area for the currently selected menu and a menu area consisting of “Yes” and “No”. Then, when the stop switch 8R is operated in a state where “Yes” is selected on the history data clear screen, all of the game history data stored in the game history data storage area of the RAM 91c except for the setting change history. Is cleared, a message indicating that the history data has been cleared is displayed as shown in FIG. 64B, and the screen returns to the administrator mode screen. If the “NO” is selected on the history data clear screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the game history data is not cleared and the screen returns to the manager mode screen.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the stop switch 8R is operated in a state where the “option” menu area is selected on the administrator mode screen, the option screen shown in FIG. 65 (a) is displayed. The option screen is provided with a menu area including “information between bonuses”, “direction introduction”, “bonus history”, “slump graph”, and “return”. Then, when the stop switch 8R is operated in a state where any one of “information between bonuses”, “introduction of presentation”, “bonus history”, and “slump graph” is selected on the option screen, the display of the corresponding viewable setting column is switched. Specifically, when “ON” indicating that browsing is enabled is displayed, it is switched to “OFF” indicating that browsing is not enabled, and “ON” is displayed when “OFF” is displayed. Switch to When the “return” is selected on the option screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the browsing valid flag is set for the item for which “ON” is displayed in the browsing setting column, while “OFF” is displayed. After clearing the viewing valid flag of the item that has been set, the screen returns to the administrator mode screen.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the stop switch 8R is operated in a state where the “setting change history” menu area is selected on the administrator mode screen, the setting change history screen shown in FIG. 65 (b) is displayed. Let The setting change history screen includes a setting change history display area for displaying the setting change history for the past five times, that is, a setting change history stored in the RAM 91c, and a menu area corresponding to “return”. Yes. When the “return” is selected on the setting change history screen and the stop switch 8R is operated, the screen returns to the administrator mode screen.

  As shown in FIG. 63D, when the stop switch 8R is operated in a state where the “return” menu area is selected on the administrator mode screen, the administrator mode is terminated and the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. The notification screen is displayed.

  As described above, when the main CPU 41a is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the administrator mode screen is displayed. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R on the screen, the game history data is displayed. Clear, setting of game history data that can be browsed by the player, and browsing of setting change history can be performed.

  In this embodiment, even if the game history data is cleared, the setting change history data is not cleared. For example, even if the setting is changed illegally, the evidence is surely left. However, the setting change history data may be cleared together with the clearing of the game history data, or the game history data and the setting change history data may be cleared by separate operations. .

  In this embodiment, a setting change history as an example of management information is stored, and the setting change history can be confirmed in the game shop setting mode. For example, the opening history of the front door of the slot machine 1 (Opening time and opening frequency information based on opening the front door), error occurrence history (error occurrence time, type of error, number of errors), etc. are stored, and these front doors are opened in the administrator mode. A history or an error occurrence history may be confirmed.

  Next, various control contents executed by the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the main CPU 41a performs a startup process (main) shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal that is output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process (main) is performed when the main CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the main CPU 41a malfunctions. This process is performed when restarting.

  In the startup process (main), first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1001), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and the voltage drop signal is input. Whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa1002), and if the voltage drop signal is input, any of the other than the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input The process proceeds to a loop process that does not perform any process.

  If it is determined in step Sa1002 that the voltage drop signal has not been input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa1003). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa1004), RAM parities of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c are calculated (Sa1005), a stop switch 36a, and an automatic settlement switch 36b. And the validity / invalidity of the stop function and automatic settlement function are set in a specific register of the main CPU 41a (Sa1006).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM parity calculated in step Sa1005 is 0 (Sa1007). If the power interruption interrupt process (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa1007, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. In this case, after executing the initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas except the used stack area among the storage areas of the RAM 41c (Sa1020), whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON, that is, the RAM 41c. Is determined (Sa1021). If the setting key switch 37 is ON, a setting start command is set in the specific command transmission buffer and transmitted to the sub CPU 91a (Sa1016). . Next, a random number to be updated in the range of 0 to 3 (specifically, the lower 2 bits of the internal lottery random number) is acquired (Sa1017), 1 is added to the acquired random number value, and the transmission interval of the operation detection command is set. After setting the transmission counter for measurement (Sa1018), the interrupt is permitted (Sa1019), and the process shifts to the setting change process, that is, the setting change state.

  If the setting key switch 37 is OFF in the step of Sa1021, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa1022), an error command indicating RAM abnormality is set in the specific command transmission buffer, and the sub CPU 91a is instructed. The transmission is performed (Sa1023), the interrupt is permitted (Sa1024), and the error processing, that is, the RAM abnormal error state is entered.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in the step of Sa1007, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa1008). If power interruption interrupt processing (main) is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa1008 (data for destruction diagnosis is power interruption) Since the data in the RAM 41c is not normal also in cases other than 5A (H) stored at the time), the process proceeds to step Sa1020 to execute initialization 1, and then the setting key switch 37 is turned on in step Sa1021. If so, after transmission of a setting start command (Sa1016), acquisition of a random number (Sa1017), setting of a transmission counter (Sa1018), interrupt is permitted (Sa1019), and the process proceeds to setting change processing, and a setting key switch If 37 is OFF, an error code setting indicating a RAM abnormality (Sa1022), an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, After Shin (Sa1023), allow interruption (Sa1024), shifts to error processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa108 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the destructive diagnosis data is cleared (Sa1009), and the unsaved work, the unused area, and the undedicated data in the RAM 41c are cleared. After performing initialization 3 for initializing the used stack area (Sa1010), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON (Sa1011). If the setting key switch 37 is ON, the process proceeds to step Sa1015. Initialize 1 is executed, transmission of a setting start command (Sa1016), acquisition of a random number (Sa1017), setting of a transmission counter (Sa1018) is permitted, interrupt is permitted (Sa1019), and the process proceeds to setting change processing. .

  If the setting key switch 37 is OFF in the step of Sa1011, each register is restored to the state before power interruption, that is, the state stored in the stack (Sa1012), the return command is set in the specific command transmission buffer, The data is transmitted to the sub CPU 91a (Sa1013), the interrupt is permitted (Sa1014), and the process returns to the last execution before the power interruption.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the control content of the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main) by the main CPU 41a of this embodiment.

  In the command transmission process, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the transmission counter assigned to the RAM 41c in order to determine whether or not it is the transmission timing of the operation detection command (Sk1191), and it is determined whether or not the value of the transmission counter is 0. (Sk 1192).

  When the value of the transmission counter is not 0 in the step of Sk1192, the process proceeds to the step of Sk1197, and when the value of the transmission counter is 0, that is, when the operation detection command is transmitted, 5 is set in the transmission counter ( (Sk1193), the confirmation data of each switch is acquired, an operation detection command that can specify the detection state (on / off) of each switch is created (Sk1194), and the created operation detection command is set in the specific command transmission buffer. (Sk1195). Then, the address of the specific command transmission buffer is set (Sk1196), and the process proceeds to step Sk1199.

  In step Sk1197, it is determined whether or not there is an untransmitted command in the normal command transmission buffer (Sk1198). If there is no untransmitted command, the command transmission process is terminated and the process returns to the original flowchart.

  If there is an untransmitted command in the normal command transmission buffer in the step of Sk1198, the address indicated by the transmission pointer of the normal command transmission buffer is set (Sk1198), and the process proceeds to the step of Sk1199.

  In step Sk1199, the command stored in the address set in step Sk1196 or Sk1198 is read, transmitted to the sub CPU 91a, the command transmission process is terminated, and the process returns to the original flowchart.

  Next, various control contents executed by the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in the present embodiment will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub control unit 91, the sub CPU 91a performs a startup process (sub) shown in FIG.

  In the startup process (sub), after initialization of the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. (Sr1001), access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sr1002). Then, the RAM parity of all storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sr1003), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Sr1004).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step of Sr1004, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, and the process proceeds to the step of Sr1005. Restore the control state before power interruption. In step Sr1005, output control of the rendering device is performed according to the restoring pattern A, not the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area, and then the process proceeds to step Sr1009.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in step Sr1004, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. Therefore, after initialization of the RAM 91c (Sr1006), the pattern 0 is set in the control pattern storage area (Sr1007), and the control is performed. After performing the output control of the rendering device according to the pattern B being restored, not the pattern 0 set in the pattern storage area, the process proceeds to step Sr1009.

  In step Sr1009, a recovery waiting flag indicating that a return command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, or a setting start command is waiting to be received is set in the RAM 91c, and interruption is permitted (Sr1010).

  After that, in the timer interrupt process (sub), it is determined whether a return command, an error command indicating a RAM error, or a setting start command is received, and the recovery waiting flag is cleared, or a return command, an error command indicating a RAM error Or, it waits until the recovery waiting time elapses without receiving any of the setting start commands (Sr1011, Sr1012), and when it is determined that the recovery waiting flag is not set in the step of Sr1011, that is, a return command, a RAM error When either an error command indicating the above or a setting start command is received, the process proceeds to loop processing.

  If it is determined that the recovery waiting time has elapsed without receiving any of the return command, the error command indicating RAM abnormality, or the setting start command in step Sr1012, the game control board 40 is not normally connected. It shifts to a connection error notification state that notifies that.

  Next, timer interrupt processing (sub) that is periodically executed by the sub CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), first, a power interruption interrupt is prohibited (Ss1001), and it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the reception buffer, that is, whether or not a command is received from the main CPU 41a. (Ss1002). If no command is stored in the reception buffer in step Ss1002, it is determined whether a recovery waiting flag is set (Ss1003). If a recovery waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Ss1043 to recover. If the wait flag is set, the process proceeds to step Ss1047.

  If a command is stored in the reception buffer in the step of Ss1002, the command is acquired from the reception buffer (Ss1004), it is determined whether or not the recovery waiting flag is set (Ss1005), and the recovery waiting flag is set. If not, the process proceeds to step Ss1019.

  If the recovery waiting flag is set in step Ss1005, it is determined whether or not the acquired command is a return command (Ss1006). If it is not a return command, the process proceeds to step Ss1009. Is cleared (Ss1007), and a detection state storage area to be described later and a detection history including an operation detection flag, a time lapse flag, a continuous operation counter, and an operation time counter to be described later are initialized (Ss1008), and the process proceeds to step Ss1040.

  In step Ss1009, it is determined whether or not the acquired command is a setting start command. If it is not a setting start command, the process proceeds to step Ss1014. If it is a setting start command, the recovery waiting flag is cleared (Ss1010), and the RAM 91c. (Ss1011), an administrator mode indicating that the administrator mode is controlled is set in the RAM 91c (Ss1012), and an administrator mode screen (to be described later) is displayed in the control pattern storage area. A pattern is set (Ss1013), and the process proceeds to step Ss1040.

  In step Ss1014, it is determined whether or not the acquired command is an error command indicating a RAM abnormal error. If it is not an error command indicating a RAM abnormal error, the command acquired this time among the commands stored in the reception buffer is determined. Clear (Ss1018) and proceed to step Ss1047.

  If the command acquired in step Ss1014 is an error command indicating a RAM abnormal error, the recovery waiting flag is cleared (Ss1015), the RAM 91c is initialized (Ss1016), and an error pattern is set in the control pattern storage area (Ss1017). ), Go to step Ss1040.

  In the step of Ss1019, it is determined whether or not the acquired command is a gaming state command, and if it is not a gaming state command, the process proceeds to the step of Ss1024. If it is a gaming state command, the gaming state of the next game specified from the gaming state command Is set in the RAM 91c (Ss1020), and it is determined whether or not the administrator mode is set (Ss1021).

  If the administrator mode is not set in step Ss1021, the process proceeds to step Ss1040. If the administrator mode is set, pattern 0 is set in the control pattern storage area (Ss1022), and the administrator mode is cleared. (Ss1023), the process proceeds to step Ss1040.

  In step Ss1024, it is determined whether or not the acquired command is a confirmation start command. If it is not a confirmation start command, the process proceeds to step Ss1028. If it is a confirmation start command, the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area is set. Save (Ss1025), set the administrator mode in the RAM 91c (Ss1026), set the administrator pattern in the control pattern storage area (Ss1027), and proceed to step Ss1040.

  In the step of Ss1028, it is determined whether or not the acquired command is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error. If it is not an error command indicating the occurrence of an error, the process proceeds to the step of Ss1031, and if it is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error, The control pattern set in the control pattern storage area is saved (Ss1029), an error pattern is set in the control pattern storage area (Ss1030), and the process proceeds to step Ss1040.

  In step Ss1031, it is determined whether the acquired command is an error command indicating error cancellation. If the command is an error command indicating error cancellation, the process proceeds to step Ss1034, and if it is not an error command indicating error cancellation, It is determined whether or not the acquired command is a confirmation end command (Ss1032). If the command acquired in step Ss1032 is not a confirmation end command, the process proceeds to step Ss1035. If the command is a confirmation end command, the administrator mode is cleared (Ss1033), and the process proceeds to step Ss1034. In step Ss1034, the saved control pattern is returned to the control pattern storage area, and the process proceeds to step Ss1040.

  In the step of Ss1035, it is determined whether or not the acquired command is an internal winning command, and if it is not an internal winning command, the process proceeds to the step of Ss1037, and if it is an internal winning command, the effect table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. An effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and an effect pattern selection process for setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game is executed (Ss1036). Proceed to step.

  In step Ss1037, it is determined whether or not the acquired command is an operation detection command. If it is not an operation detection command, the process proceeds to step Ss1039. If it is an operation detection command, the operation detection process 1 updates the detection state of the operation switch. Is executed (Ss1038), and the process proceeds to step Ss1042.

  In step Ss1039, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the acquired command are read out, and the control pattern in the control pattern storage area is read out. Is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss1040.

  In step Ss1040, it is determined whether the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area matches the output state of the rendering device, and the control pattern set in the control pattern storage region and the output state of the rendering device are determined. If they match, the process proceeds to step Ss1042, and if they do not match, control of various effect devices such as effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LED, etc. according to the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area. The effect control process 1 is performed (Ss1041), and the process proceeds to Ss1042.

  In step Ss1042, the command acquired this time among the commands stored in the reception buffer is cleared, and the process proceeds to step Ss1043. In step Ss1043, operation detection processing 2 for monitoring whether or not the operation switch has been operated for a predetermined time is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss1044.

  In step Ss1044, it is determined whether or not the administrator mode is set. If the administrator mode is not set, the rendering is performed according to the control pattern set in the control pattern storage area, the detection state of the operation switch, and the like. The effect control process 2 for controlling various effect devices such as the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed (Ss1045), and the process proceeds to step Ss1047. If the administrator mode is set in the step of Ss1044, an administrator mode process for performing access control to the management information according to the detection state of the operation switch is executed (Ss1046), and the process proceeds to the step of Ss1047.

  In step Ss1047, after updating the values of various counters, the interruption interruption prohibited in step Ss101 is permitted (Ss1048), and the timer interruption process (sub) ends.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the control content of the operation detection process 1 executed in the timer interrupt process (sub) described above by the sub CPU 91a.

  In the operation detection processing 1, the operation detection command indicates the detection state of each operation switch in the detection state storage area in which the change state (previous detection state and current detection state) of the operation switch is stored for each operation switch. Update according to the detection state (Ss1201).

  Next, the updated detection state storage area is referenced to determine whether the detection state of any operation switch has changed from OFF to ON (Ss1202). If there is no operation switch that has changed from OFF to ON, Ss1206 If there is an operation switch that has changed from OFF to ON, the operation detection flag storage area (rising or falling) indicating that the operation state of the operation switch has changed is stored for each operation switch. In addition, a rising flag is set corresponding to the operation switch changed from OFF to ON (Ss1203), and a continuous operation counter that counts the number of times of continuous operation for each operation switch is updated (Ss1204). Specifically, the counter values corresponding to those other than the operation switch that has changed from OFF to ON are cleared, and the counter value that corresponds to the operation switch that has changed from OFF to ON is added once.

  Next, the value of the counter corresponding to the operation switch changed from OFF to ON among the operation time counters for measuring the time during which each operation switch is continuously operated is initialized (set to 0) (Ss1205). , The process proceeds to step Ss1206.

  In step Ss1206, the updated detection state storage area is referenced to determine whether the detection state of any of the operation switches has changed from ON to OFF. If there is no operation switch that has changed from ON to OFF, Returning to the flowchart of FIG. 70, if there is an operation switch changed from ON to OFF, a falling flag is set in the operation detection flag storage area corresponding to the operation switch changed from ON to OFF (Ss1207). Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the operation detection process 2 executed by the sub CPU 91a in the timer interrupt process (sub) described above.

  In the operation detection process 2, it is determined whether or not there is an operation switch whose current state is ON by referring to the detection state storage area (Ss1301). If there is no operation switch whose current state is ON, FIG. Return to the flowchart.

  If there is an operation switch whose current state is ON in step Ss1301, the value of the operation time counter of the operation switch whose current state is ON is referred to, and whether or not 10 seconds have passed since the operation switch was turned on. (Ss1302), if 10 seconds have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Ss1304. If 10 seconds have elapsed, a 10-second elapsed flag is set (Ss1303), and the process proceeds to step Ss1304.

  In step Ss1304, the value of the operation time counter of the operation switch whose current state is ON is referred to, and it is determined whether or not 5 seconds have elapsed since the operation switch was turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss1306, and if 5 seconds have elapsed, a 5-second elapsed flag is set (Ss1305), and the process proceeds to step Ss1306.

  In step Ss1306, the value of the operation time counter of the operation switch whose current state is ON is referred to, and it is determined whether or not 3 seconds have elapsed since the operation switch was turned ON. 71, if 3 seconds have passed, a 3 second elapsed flag is set (Ss1307), and the flow returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the power interruption interrupt process (sub) executed when the sub CPU 91a receives a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  In the power interruption interruption process (sub), first, interruption is prohibited (St1001). That is, other interrupt processes are prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt process (sub). Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (St1002).

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (St1003). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not input, the register saved in the stack area is restored in St1002 (St1004), the interrupt prohibited in the step of St1001 is permitted (St1005), and the processing before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step St1003, all output ports are initialized (St1006). Next, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 (St1007), and access to the RAM 91c is prohibited (St1008).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (St1009, where St1009 is the same process as St1003), the process enters a loop process in which no process is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the sub CPU 91a reliably stops operation when power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described activation processing (sub) is executed, and when the RAM parity becomes 0, the original processing is restored. .

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined whether the voltage has been restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process (sub). However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the activation is performed based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 95. You may make it transfer to a process (sub).

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and changes and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 7 Start switch 6 MAXBET switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main controller 41a Main CPU
91 Sub controller 91a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the display result is displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is completed by being derived and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
A plurality of operation means operable by a player;
The first operation means among the plurality of operation means is involved in the game progress control, and the second operation means is not operated in the specific state where the second operation means is not involved in the game progress control. When the first operation means is operated, a special effect is executed, and when the second operation means is operated before the first operation means is operated , the special effect is not executed , A first effect mode in which the special effect is executed when the first operation unit is operated after the second operation unit is operated, and the second operation unit is not operated in the specific state. The second effect that executes the special effect both when the first operation unit is operated and when the second operation unit is operated before the first operation unit is operated. Production mode selection for selecting any of the production modes And the stage,
Special effect execution means for executing the special effect in the effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means;
A slot machine characterized by comprising:

Images